Skoda Yeti (2016/11) Owner Manual

SIMPLY CLEVER
OWNER'S MANUAL
ŠKODA Yeti

5L0012791AM
Preface
You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
The description of the vehicle operation, important information concerning
safety, vehicle care, maintenance and support, as well as technical vehicle
data, are provided in this Owner's Manual.
For vehicles with Infotainment, the operation of some of the functions and
vehicle systems are operated via Infotainment.
Please carefully read not only this Owner's Manual, but also the infotainment Owner's Manual. Proceeding in accordance with the both instruction
manuals is a prerequisite for the correct use of the vehicle.
When using the vehicle, the generally binding country-specific legal requirements (eg. for the carriage of children, airbag deactivation, tire use, road
transport, etc.) must always be observed.
Please always pay attention when driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety.
We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at
all times.
5L0012791AM

Your ŠKODA AUTO
Table of Contents
Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty
for new cars
4
On-board literature
7
Notes
8
Structure of the Owner's Manual and further
information
9
Abbreviations
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Correct and safe seated position
11
11
11
Seat belts
Using seat belts
Automatic belt retractors and belt
tensioners
14
14
16
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Deactivating airbags
17
17
20
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Fastening elements
22
22
25
Using the system
cockpit
Overview
29
28
Instruments and warning lights
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
30
30
33
2
Table of Contents
information system
Driver information system
Operation of the information system
Multifunction display (MFD)
MAXI DOT display
Service interval display
SmartGate
40
40
42
43
44
46
47
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Anti-theft alarm system
Luggage compartment lid
Window operation
Panorama sliding/tilting roof
50
50
54
55
56
58
Lights and visibility
Lights
Interior lighting
Visibility
Windscreen wipers and washers
Rear view mirror
60
60
64
65
67
68
Seats and head restraints
Front seats
Rear seats
Headrests
Front seat heating
71
71
73
76
76
Useful features
Interior fittings
Tablet holder
77
77
87
Transport of cargo
Luggage compartment and Transport
Variable loading floor in the luggage
compartment (Estate)
Transportation on the roof rack
89
89
Heating and ventilation
Heating, manual air conditioning system,
Climatronic
Aux. heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)
96
94
95
96
100
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
START-STOPsystem
Brakes and parking
Manual shifting of gears and pedals
Automatic transmission
Running in and economical driving
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
103
103
105
106
108
109
111
112
Assistance systems
General information
Braking and stabilisation systems
OFF ROADmode
Parking assistance (ParkPilot)
Reversing camera
Park Assist
Speed control system
Fatigue detection
Tyre pressure monitoring
113
113
113
115
117
119
121
124
125
126
Towing device and trailer
Towing device
Using hitch
127
127
131
General Maintenance
Technical data
Care and Maintenance
Service work, modifications and technical
alterations
Service intervals
Cleaning and care
133
133
135
137
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
AdBlue® and its refilling
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Coolant
Brake fluid
Vehicle battery
141
141
143
144
146
147
149
149
Wheels
Wheels and tyres
Operating in winter conditions
152
152
154
Technical data
Basic vehicle data
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
177
177
182
Index
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Emergency equipment
Changing a wheel
Breakdown kit
Jump-starting
Towing the vehicle
Remote control and removable light replacing the battery/batteries
Emergency unlocking / locking of doors
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
166
167
168
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Bulbs
169
169
172
156
156
157
161
163
164
Table of Contents
3
Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new
cars
er / supplier. If there are any problems with the provision of the guarantee by
these manufacturers, an authorized ŠKODA dealer will assist you in finding a
solution.
Warranty period
Using a ŠKODA partner, ŠKODA Auto India Private Limited gives 2 years new
car warranty from the date of purchase with no limitation on mileage.
Maintenance implementation and mechanical customisations
This warranty does not apply to costs of consumables or work as part of regular maintenance. A tyre change, a wheel alignment and balancing are also considered to be scheduled maintenance.
Warranty coverage
This warranty extends to the repair or replacement of all parts that need to be
repaired or replaced due to inadequate workmanship or the parts being defective; this is in order to restore the vehicle to its original production specifications while adhering to deadlines and the requirements set out in this Owner's
Manual.
The ŠKODA partner decides on the type of repair, taking into account economic aspects as regards to the technologies recommended by ŠKODA Auto India
Private Limited.
An adequate period of time should be provided for the completion of the warranty repair after the notification of the vehicle with a ŠKODA partner.
Where can you claim warranty
The warranty is provided by a ŠKODA partner.
Beginning and end of the warranty period
The warranty period begins on the date of delivery of the new vehicle to the
original purchaser or lessee.
This new vehicle warranty is automatically transferred free of charge when
ownership of the vehicle takes place during the warranty period.
In terms of the repairs made, or parts built-in during the warranty period, the
warranty expires at the end of the warranty period of the respective vehicle.
Tyres and vehicle batteries
Some parts with which ŠKODA vehicles are equipped, such as tyres, batteries,
etc., are not produced by ŠKODA Auto India Private Limited, but are provided
by other suppliers. These parts are excluded from the ŠKODA warranty, but the
vehicle purchaser can make a warranty claim with the respective manufactur-
1)
4
Exception is for the bi-xenon gas discharge lamps in the headlights, they are
covered by a 2 year warranty. Damaged bulbs in the headlights caused by
external influences are excluded from the warranty.
Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
This warranty does not apply to the change of spark plugs, oils, lubricants, fluids or refrigerants, as long as their exchange is not an integral part of the warranty with respect to the relevant part.
Defective light bulbs 1), wiper blades, brake shoes or brake pads which occur
within six months or 10 000 km, whichever occurs first, can be repaired due to
deficient workmanship or the parts being defective. After expiry of the time
limits mentioned above these are regarded as natural wear and tear and are
excluded from the warranty.
Taking care of the minor vehicle parts, such as the cleaning of fabrics / leather
upholstery inside the vehicle, the protective wax covering of various body
parts, are considered maintenance and are excluded from the warranty. A
damaged or fading of trim, soft elements and leather parts due to the effect of
weather conditions or usage are excluded from the warranty.
The term "normal wear and tear" cannot be predefined, because different
types of use leads to different defects or types of wear. Particularly sensitive
components, such as spark plugs, clutch plates and related components, are
easily identifiable and are excluded from the warranty.
Mechanical adjustments that are not material or workmanship related (especially doors, flaps and headlight settings) are excluded from the guarantee after 10 000 km or 6 months, whichever occurs first. After this period, these
faults are considered normal wear and tear.
Immaterial errors that do not affect the vehicle function, including noise or vibration, and anything similar, are excluded from the warranty.

Damage or failure due to the misuse, neglect, alteration, accident or in the
event of a fire
This warranty does not relate to:
▶ Damage or failure due to improper vehicle repair, such as by the installation
of non-original parts or accessories that have an effect on the specifications
of the vehicle performance compared to the specifications of the vehicle
manufacturer (unwarranted changes are excluded from the warranty).
▶ Cases in which in the vehicle parts, especially electronic components, have
been installed, which have not been released by the manufacturer ŠKODA
Auto India Private Limited.
▶ Damage or failure due to the use of contaminated or incorrect / falsified
fuels, intentional or unintentional incorrectly refuelled.
▶ Damage or failure due to vehicle use for competitions or for record attempts,
driving schools or for driving generally in unsuitable places or as a result of
an accident or fire.
▶ Damage or failure due to the permanent vehicle operation in spite of the indication of a mechanical or operational problem by means of a warning light,
a measuring instrument or other warning.
▶ Damaged, or due to the declaration of an insurance company, fully written
off vehicles or vehicles that were essentially assembled or repaired with
parts from other used stripped vehicles.
▶ Vehicles where the damage is due to improper storage, intentional or fraudulent conduct on the part of the owner or driver.
▶ Vehicles where the damage is due to operating in contradiction to the instructions in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
▶ Repairs or regular / recommended service work that is performed other than
by an authorized specialist garage.
Damage or failure due to the lack of maintenance
This warranty does not apply to damage or failure due to a failure to implement the recommended maintenance and operational requirements set out in
this Owner's Manual.
Damage caused by environmental influences
This warranty does not cover damage caused by highly atmospheric industrial
pollution (e.g. acid rain), bad weather, fire, theft or terrorist activities, frost or
heat, floods including any immersion, flooding and/or hydrostatic obstacles
and other damage due to water soaking, earthquakes, natural disasters,
strikes, riots, civil unrest, nuclear threat, bird droppings, stone chips, tree resin
or other similar external mechanical or chemical events of any kind.
1)
Damage caused by external influences are not considered faults and are excluded from the warranty.
Manipulation of the odometer
This warranty does not apply to repairs of ŠKODA vehicles in which the odometer has been tampered with or where the actual mileage cannot be read directly.
Other costs
This warranty does not refer to the incidental or consequential damages mentioned below that are due to a fault or a warranty/advertising repair by a dealer.
Costs related to communication, loading, parking in the garage and other services due to a vehicle breakdown in a remote location or in the city.
All costs relating to personal injury or property damage.
Psychological damage caused by the breakdown and during the period in
which the vehicle is in a repair shop.
Reimbursement of lost time, loss of business or for hiring a replacement product during the repair period.
Legal obligations with respect to deaths, injuries or property damage, etc.
Other terms and conditions
This warranty explicitly does not cover a vehicle exchange or money refund.
ŠKODA Auto India Private Limited reserves the right to enhance or make design changes to all models of the ŠKODA brand without having to make similar
changes to previously sold vehicles.
All replaced faulty parts under this warranty become the property of ŠKODA
Auto India Private Limited.
The place of jurisdiction for the negotiation and processing of any legal disputes is the city of Aurangabad (Maharashtra State).
Paintwork and body warranty
In addition to the warranty conditions listed in the purchase contract for new
ŠKODA vehicles, an authorized ŠKODA dealer additionally ensures that the vehicle has the following warranty:
▶ 3 years against paint defects1),
▶ 6 years against the corrosion of the bodywork1).
From the date of delivery of the new vehicle.
Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
5

This type of damage will be repaired by any authorized ŠKODA dealer free of
charge.
The warranty does not relate to:
▶ Damage due to external factors or inappropriate/insufficient care.
▶ Body and paint damage, whereby the repair was not carried out promptly and
professionally in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and using
ŠKODA genuine parts.
▶ Corrosion perforation due to the use of parts other than ŠKODA Genuine
Parts or the application of technologies other than those authorised by the
manufacturer or due to an incorrectly performed repair contrary to the manufacturer's instructions.
Customer Notice
The vehicle owner has the right and the duty to bring the vehicle during the
warranty period to an authorized ŠKODA dealer for a service check / regular
maintenance according to the instructions listed in the service schedule and in
the Owner's Manual.
If a fault or problem is detected on the vehicle the nearest authorized ŠKODA
dealer must be informed immediately. Should the customer violate these instructions, use the vehicle and thus increase the extent of damage, the warranty may be limited or possibly even revoked.
For repair under this warranty the vehicle should be registered with the authorized ŠKODA dealer during normal working hours.
The authorized ŠKODA dealer may refuse warranty service if it is not able to be
proven with the service forms or repair orders / invoices that regular maintenance has been performed at the right time.
Should the original purchaser sell the vehicle during the warranty period, the
subsequent purchaser is obliged to inform the authorized ŠKODA dealer from
which the vehicle was purchased about this fact within 30 days of purchase,
and fill out an item in this manual.
The customer must present an invoice to the seller in order to claim the spare
parts warranty for these parts.
6
Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
On-board literature
You will always find this Owner's Manual in the on-board literature. Depending
on the equipment fitted, the on-board literature can also contain the Infotainment Owner's Manual or The radio Owner's Manual.
literature online
Fig. 1
On-board literature online on the
ŠKODA web pages
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual is valid for all body variants of the vehicle and for all related models and equipment levels.
This Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identifying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equipment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment components described in this Owner's Manual.
The range of equipment installed in your vehicle depends on the purchase
contract for the vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment
please call a ŠKODA Partner if necessary.
The Pictures in this Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illustrations can differ from your vehicle in minor details only; they are only intended to provide general information.
ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development
with all vehicles. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time
with regard to design, equipment and technology. The information listed in
this Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of
publication.
for legal claims be made based on the technical data, illustrations and information contained in this Owner's Manual.
Todisplay user manuals online proceed as follows.
1. Read the QR-Code » fig. 1 using the corresponding application in your external device (e.g. Phone, tablet) or enter the following address in your
web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
The web page with a model overview of the ŠKODAbrand is opened.
2. Select the desired model - a menu for the user manuals is displayed.
3. Select the construction period as well as the language.
4. Select one of the following manual types.
 File in pdfformat
 On-lineversion of the manual
 Variant for the mobile device - My ŠKODA App application
We recommend that the websitesare referred to in this Owner's Manual to indicate in the classic representation. mobile display, the web pages may not
contain all the required information.
Infotainment Owner's Manual
The infotainment Owner's Manual contains a description of the infotainment
service, and where necessary some functions and vehicle systems.
The radio Owner's Manual
The Owner's Manual for the radio contains a description for operating the radio, and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems.
On-board literature
7
Notes
Terms used
“Specialist garage” - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA Service
Partner, or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA Service Partner” - A workshop that has been contractually authorised
by ŠKODA AUTO or its sales partner to service ŠKODA vehicles and to
sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA partners” - A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or
its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable, to
service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
Text notes
“Press” - Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
“Hold” - Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Explanation of symbols
Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor
mation and safety warnings
 Situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible
®
Trademark
 Phone Text displayed in the MAXI DOT display
 Text display in the segment display
→ Marker to the next operation step
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, injury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
Notice
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
8
Notes
Structure of the Owner's Manual and further
information
Structure of the Owner's Manual
The Owner's Manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas.
■
Section (e.g. Operating instructions) - the title of the section is shown down
on the lower left-hand side
■ Main chapter (e.g. Checking and refilling) - the title of the main chapter is
shown on the lower right-hand side
■ Chapter (e.g. Engine oil)
■  Introduction to the topic – Module Overview within the chapter, introductory information about the chapter content, if necessary, valid for
the entire chapter notes
■ Module (e.g. Checking and refilling)
Information search
When searching for information in the Owner's Manual, we recommend using
the Index at the end of the Owner's Manual.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the forward direction that the vehicle is travelling.
Units of measurement
The volume, weight, speed and length specifications are given in metric units,
unless otherwise stated.
Display symbols
In this Owner's Manual, MAXI DOT display screen is used as the display to illustrate the instrument cluster, provided it is not otherwise stated.
Emergency assistance
In case of breakdown, the breakdown service contact information required can
be found in the following places.
▶ Contact details for the ŠKODA Partner (e.g. window sticker)
▶ Infotainment (Phone - breakdown service / information service
▶ ŠKODA mobile application
▶ ŠKODA web pages
menu)
Structure of the Owner's Manual and further information
9
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Engine revolutions per minute
ABS
Anti-lock brake system
AF
Multi-purpose vehicles
Meaning
Nm
Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
PIN
personal identification number
SCR
TDI CR
Diesel engine for which the AdBlue ® solution is required
Diesel engine with turbocharger and common rail injection
system
AHL
Adaptive headlights
TSA
Trailer stabilisation
AG
Automatic gearbox
TSI
Petrol engine with turbo-charging and direct injection
AGM
Vehicle battery type
VIN
TCS
traction control
W
CO2
Carbon dioxide
Wi-Fi
COC
Declaration of conformity
DPF
Diesel particle filter
DSG
automatic double clutch gearbox
DSR
Active driver-steering recommendation
EDL
Electronic differential lock
ECE
Economic Commission for Europe
EPC
EPC fault light
ESC
Electronic Stability Control
ET
Offset of the rim
EU
European Union
HBA
Hydraulic brake assist
HHC
Uphill start assist
KESSY
keyless unlocking, starting and locking
kW
Kilowatt, measuring unit for output
LED
Lighting element type
MFD
Multifunction display
MG
Manual gearbox
MPI
Petrol engine with multi-point fuel injection
MSR
Engine drag torque control
N1
NiMH
10
Meaning
rpm
Abbreviation
A van intended exclusively or mainly for the transportation
of goods
Nickel metal hydride
Abbreviations
Vehicle identification number
Watt, unit of power
wireless data network
▶ Protect
children by using a suitable child seat» page 22, Transporting children safely.
▶ Adopt the correct seating position. Tell your passengers to assume the correct seating position » page 11, Correct and safe seated position.
Safety
Passive Safety
General information

Driving safety
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Before setting off
Driving safety
11
11
In this section of the instructions you will find important information on the
subject of passive safety. Here, we have combined everything which you
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, children’s
safety and anything similar.
Other important safety information can also be found in the subsequent sections of this Owner's Manual. Therefore, the Owner's Manual should always be
kept in the vehicle.
Before setting off
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
▶ Check the function of the lighting and turn signal systems.
▶ Check the wiper function and the wiper blades for wear. Check the windscreen washer fluid level.
▶ Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
▶ Adjust the rear-view mirror so that rear viewing is assured. Ensure that the
mirrors are not covered.
▶ Check the tyre inflation pressure.
▶ Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
▶ Secure all items of luggage.
▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
vehicle.
▶ Close all doors and the engine compartment and the boot.
▶ Ensure that no objects are obstructing the pedals.
In the interests of traffic safety, the following information must be observed.
▶ Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g. by
your passengers or mobile phone calls).
▶ Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, alcohol, drugs or the like).
▶ Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
▶ Always adjust your driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
▶ Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
Correct and safe seated position

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Correct seated position of the driver
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Correct seating position for the front passenger
Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats
12
12
13
13
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not observed, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Do not lean against the dashboard.
▶ Do not put your feet on the dashboard.
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not observed, may cause serious injuries or death.
▶ Do not sit only on the front area of the seat.
▶ Do not sit facing to the side.
▶ Do not lean out of the window.
▶ Do not put your limbs out of the window.
▶ Do not put your feet on the seat upholstery.
Passive Safety

11
WARNING
At all times, the front seats and head restraints must be adjusted to
match the person's body size and the seat belt must be attached properly
to provide the most effective levels of protection to passengers.
■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 22, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
■ The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving, otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag
system – risk of injury!
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering
wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm» fig. 2 - A .
Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with integrated headrests)» fig. 2 - C .
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 14, Using seat belts.

■
WARNING
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries.
Correct seated position of the driver


WARNING
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a distance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dashboard around the
area of the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean
that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you – hazard!
■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » fig. 2. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, in the event
of airbag deployment, you could suffer serious injury to the arms, hands
and head.
■ Ensure there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get behind the pedals while driving. You would then no longer be able to operate
the clutch, brake or accelerate.
■
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 2 Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel position

Read and observe
on page 12 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following should be observed.
 Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
 For vehicles equipped with driver knee airbags, adjust the driver's seat in a
forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the
legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the knee airbag» fig. 2 - B .
 Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
12
Safety
Fig. 3 Setting steering wheel position

Read and observe
on page 12 first.
The height and directional position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
› Swing the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow
» fig. 3.
1

› Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be
adjusted in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Pull the safety lever until it stops in the direction of arrow
3.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving -only when
the vehicle is stationary!
■ The safety lever must always be locked so that the steering wheel cannot
accidentally change position – There is a risk of an accident!
■
Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats

Read and observe
on page 12 first.
For the safety of the passengers in the rear seats, and to reduce the risk of
injury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed.
 Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of the head» fig. 2 on page 12 - C .
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 14, Using seat belts.
Correct seating position for the front passenger

Read and observe
on page 12 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed.
 Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dashboards that
the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
 Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of your head» fig. 2 on page 12 - C (not for seats
with integrated headrests).
 Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 14.
WARNING
A distance of least 25 cm to the dash panel should be maintained, otherwise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - There is a risk to
life!
■ Always keep your feet in the feet area when the car is being driven – never place your feet on the dashboard, out of the window or on the surface of
the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury when braking or in
the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
■
Passive Safety
13
Seat belts
Using seat belts

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Correct routing of seat belt
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Seat belt for the rear middle seat
15
15
16
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
The seat belts reduce kinetic energy to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
When transporting a child the following instructions must be observed
» page 22, Transporting children safely.
WARNING
Fasten seat belts before every journey! This also applies to other passengers - there is a danger of injury!
■ Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
» page 11, Correct and safe seated position.
■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
■
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of safety belts
■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder – but not
across your neck.
14
Safety
WARNING (Continued)
No two persons (including children) should ever use a single seat belt together.
■ The belt tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jacket) impairs the natural sitting position and impairs proper operation of the
seat belts.
■ Do not use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for shortening the belts for smaller persons).
■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably
when the rear seat rests are correctly locked into position » page 74.
■
WARNING
Information on the maintenance of safety belts
■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 140.
■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If damage to
the parts of the seat belt system (e.g. the strap, the belt connectors, the
retractor, the lock or similar) are detected, the seat belt in question must
be replaced by a specialist immediately.
■ Seat belts which have been subject to stress in an accident should be replaced by a specialist garage. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
Correct routing of seat belt
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
› Push the return pulley upwards in the direction of arrow» fig. 5 - .
› Or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows 1 and push the
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 5 - .
› Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place.
WARNING
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts that are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. pencils,
spectacles, pens, keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
■
Fig. 4 Routing of belt over the shoulders and the lap belt/Routing of belt
for an expectant mother
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Fig. 5 Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats

Read and observe
on page 14 first.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder belt should be positioned approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (under no circumstances across your neck) and lie flush to the
chest» fig. 4 - .
The lower part of the belt should run across the pelvis (it should not lie on top
of the stomach) and must always fit snugly» fig. 4 - .
For pregnant women, the lower part of the belt must be positioned as low
down as possible across the pelvis, to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen» fig. 4 - .
Fig. 6 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt

Read and observe
on page 14 first.
Before fastening the belt
› Adjust the head restraint properly (does not apply to seats with integrated
head restraints).
› Adjust the seat (applies to the front seats).
› Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats).
Fasten
› Use the belt tongue to slowly pull the belt over your chest and pelvis.
Seat belts

15
› Insert the belt tongue into the belt buckle of the seat, » fig. 6 –  until it audibly clicks into place.
› Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Release
› Grip the lock tongue and press the red button in the buckle» fig. 6 - , the
lock tongue pops out.
› Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the
webbing rolls up fully.
WARNING
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt tongue
will not lock in place properly.
WARNING
After releasing the seat belt hold it tight and let it slowly reel up until
both lock tongues lock into the headliner mount and are secured with a
magnet - there is a risk of injury.
■ Never unlock both lock tongues simultaneously - There is a risk of injury.
■ The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt
tongue will not lock in place properly.
■
Automatic belt retractors and belt tensioners

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Seat belt for the rear middle seat

Read and observe
on page 14 first.
The seat belt for the rear middle seat is anchored in the boot area, on the left
side of the headliner.
Fasten
› Pull the belt with both buckle tongues out of the headliner mount.
› Insert the belt tongue at the end of the belt into the belt buckle on the left
side until it is audibly locked in place.
› Pull the second belt tongue, which is moveable on the seat belt, over the
chest and insert it into the belt buckle on the right side until it is audibly
locked in place.
› Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
The lock tongue of the belt is shaped differently so that they only fit into the
respective belt buckle. If you are not able to insert a belt tongue into the
wrong belt lock, you probably tried to put it into the wrong buckle.
Release
› Take off the safety belt in the reverse order to how you fasten it.
› Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the
webbing rolls up fully.
Automatic belt retractors
Belt tensioners
16
16
Automatic belt retractors
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the automatic belt retractor. The belts also block when full braking occurs, when the car accelerates,
when driving downhill and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
by the belt tensioners fitted to the automatic belt retractors of the front seat
belts.
If there is a collision of a certain severity, the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that any unwanted body motion is prevented.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor collisions, in the case
of a roll-over and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
16
Safety

WARNING
Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and installation of system components because of other repair work, must only be
carried out by a specialist garage.
■ If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
■
Notice
The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This indicates
there is no fire in the vehicle.
■
■
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
17
18
19
System description
Airbag deployment
Safety instructions
As a supplement to the seat belts, the airbag system provides additional occupant protection during severe frontal and side-on collisions.
The airbag will only provide optimum protection in conjunction with wearing
the seat belt, the airbag is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light 
in the instrument cluster » page 38.
System description
Fig. 7 Airbag installation points
Airbag installation points » fig. 7
A Front airbags
B Driver’s knee airbag
C Front side airbags

Airbag system
17
D
E
Rear side airbags
Head airbags
Airbag deployment
Front airbags - the forward thrust of the driver and of the front passenger is
cushioned when they make contact with the fully-inflated airbag, and the risk
of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
The front airbags can be identified by the lettering featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the passenger side.
Driver´s knee airbag - The forward movement of the body is cushioned when
it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag, and the risk of injury to the legs
of the driver is thus reduced.
The knee airbag is provided with the lettering on the dashboard on the
driver's side.
Side airbags - The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunged into the
fully inflated airbag. The risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach
and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door.
The side air bags are marked by a label with the lettering on the front
seat backrests. The rear side airbags are provided with the lettering in between the entrance area and the rear seat backrest.
Head airbags - The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it
makes contact with the fully inflated airbag, and the risk of injury to head and
chest is thus reduced.
The head airbags are provided with the letteringmarked on the B-pillar
cladding.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following parts.
▶ Individual airbags.
▶ Warning light in the instrument cluster» page 38.
▶ Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 21.
▶ Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dashboard» page 21.
Fig. 8 Inflated airbags
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
When triggered, the airbag fills with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the airbag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
When the airbag inflates, smoke is released. This is not a sign of a fire in the
vehicle.
Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. The important factors here are the hardness of the object with which the vehicle collides, the angle of impact, vehicle
speed etc.
A decisive factor in the deployment of the airbags is the degree of deceleration
at the time. If the vehicle deceleration that occurs is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control
unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe
damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
▶ Driver’s front airbag.
▶ Front passenger airbag.
▶ Driver’s knee airbag.
18
Safety

The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision.
▶ Front side airbag.
▶ Rear side airbag.
▶ Head airbag.
WARNING (Continued)
If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must then be replaced.
In the area of the front airbag and the knee airbag, the surface of the
steering wheel and the dashboard should be cleaned using only a dry cloth
or one that has been dampened with water.
■
■
The following events occur when an airbag deploys.
▶ The hazard warning lights are switched on.
▶ All the doors are unlocked.
▶ The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
▶ The interior light comes on (if the automatic
operation of the interior light is
switched on - position ).
When there is no air bag deployment?
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment.
Safety instructions
Fig. 9
Safe distance from the steering
wheel and dash panel
WARNING
General information
■ The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer optimum protection
if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 11.
■ The airbag unleashes enormous force when triggered, which can lead to
serious injuries or fatalities if the driver and passengers are not seated
properly. This applies in particular to children who are transported without
using a suitable child safety seat » page 24.
■ If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
the event of an accident.
WARNING
Information about the front airbags
■ For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or the panel » fig. 9 - A , If you do
not keep this distance, it means that the airbag system cannot protect you
- there is a risk to life! The front seats and the headrests must always also
be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
■ It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat
in which the child is seated on the front passenger seat, with its back facing the travel direction » page 20, Deactivating airbags. If this is not done,
there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed.
■ No other persons, animals or objects should be placed in front of the occupants in the front seats in the deployment area of the front airbags.
■ The steering wheel and the surface of the dash panel on the passenger
side must not be plastered, covered or modified in any way. No parts (e.g.
cup holders, mobile phone mounts etc.) may be mounted near the airbag
installation points and in the airbag deployment area.
■ Never place objects on the surface of the dash panel on the passenger
side.
WARNING
Information about knee airbags
■ Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap
of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the
knee airbag» fig. 9 - B . If it is not possible to meet this requirement due to
your body size, visit a specialist garage.
■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dashboard below the steering column cannot have stickers attached, be covered or
modified in any other way. Nothing may be attached to the cover of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity.
■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ignition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and
can cause injuries.
Airbag system
19

WARNING
Information on side and head airbags
■ No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be located in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories
(e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - There is a risk of injury!
■ Hang only light clothing on the hooks in the vehicle, do not leave any
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. Do not use hangers to hang up
clothes.
■ The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further information » page 134.
■ No excessive force, e.g. through blows, kicks etc. should be applied to the
seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side airbags. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of a type expressly authorised by ŠKODA AUTO. In
view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use
of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the
protective function of the side airbag.
■ Any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installation
points for the side airbags should be immediately repaired by a specialist
company.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
■ Any work on the airbag system, including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel), must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information
» page 134.
■ No changes of any sort should be made to parts of the airbag system, the
front bumper or the bodywork.
■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might result in the airbag being deployed.
20
Safety
Deactivating airbags

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Deactivating airbags
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
20
21
Deactivating airbags
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch
» fig. 10 on page 21 - .
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags as appropriate.
A warning light indicates that the airbag has been deactivated » page 38.
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones
outlined below.
▶ If a child seat must be used on the front passenger seat, where the child is
transported facing towards the rear» page 22.
▶ If not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle
of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly adjusted.
▶ If special attachments are required in the steering wheel area due to a physical disability.
▶ If other seats have been installed (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).
WARNING
If an airbag is deactivated at the time of the vehicle being sold, the purchaser must be informed!
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
WARNING
The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can
cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag can be
triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death!
■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off.
■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
■ If the warning lights     flash, the front passenger airbag will not
be deployed in the event of an accident! Have the airbag system checked
by a specialist garage immediately.
■
Fig. 10 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag/warning light
for front passenger airbag
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
Key switch positions » fig. 10 - 
 The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched
on, the warning light  » fig. 10illuminates - 
 The front passenger airbag is switched on - after switching on the ignition,
the warning light illuminates for 65 seconds  
Switch off
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
› Fold the key bit out completely using the radio key » .
› Insert the key into the key slot of the key switch until it stops.
› Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage compartment on the front passenger's side.
› Check that the warning light lights up after the ignition is switched on.
Switching on
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage compartment on the front passenger's side.
› Fold the key bit out completely using the radio key » .
› Insert the key into the key slot in the key switch until it stops.
› Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
› Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
› Close the storage compartment on the front passenger's side.
› Check that the warning light  lights up after the ignition is switched on.
Airbag system
21
Transporting children safely
Child seat

Introduction
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, children should only be transported
in child seats!
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
Use of a child seat on the front seat
Child safety and the side airbag
Classification of child seats
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
23
23
24
24
24
Please refer to the instructions in this Owner's Manual and the child seat manufacturer's instructions with regard to the installation and use of the child
seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport children in the
rear seats. Only transport a child in the passenger seat in exceptional circumstances.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe
standard must be used.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard have a test seal that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number below.
WARNING
One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
In an emergency, they might not be able to get out of the vehicle on their
own or to help themselves. There is a risk to life at very high or very low
temperatures!
■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire travelling time!
Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the child would be thrown through
the vehicle and as a result may suffer fatal injuries, and also injure other occupants.
■
■
22
Safety
WARNING (Continued)
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents.
■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.
■ When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.
■ When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the
headrests so that they are as high as possible.
■ If the headrests still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in
the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 76. After removing the child seat, refit the headrests.
■
Notice
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODAvehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat
Does not apply to Taiwan
side. Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does
not “jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is an injury
risk to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt!
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
■ Once a child seat in which the child is transported with its back to the direction of travel is no longer being used on the passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag should be reactivated.
■
Use of a child seat on the front seat
Applies to Taiwan
Fig. 11 Warning labels

Read and observe
Fig. 12
Warning labels
on page 22 first.
Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protected by
an active airbag positioned in front of it. This could cause serious injury to
the child, even death.
This warning is also given on stickers that are located in the following places.
the passenger sun visor» fig. 11 - .
the B-column on the front passenger side» fig. 11 – .
▶ On
▶ On
The following advice must be heeded when using a child seat in which the
child is carried on the front passenger seat.
▶ It is essential to deactivate the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in
which the child is transported with its back facing the direction of travel » .
▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical,
so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no contact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
▶ Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
▶ Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
▶ With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B column on the passenger

Read and observe
on page 22 first.
No transporting babies, infants, and children in the front passenger seat.
A label to this effect can also be found on the passenger's sun visor » fig. 12.
Transporting children safely
23
Classification of child seats
Child safety and the side airbag
Fig. 13
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly secured
- risk from the side airbag/Child
properly protected by safety seat

Read and observe

Read and observe
on page 22 first.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group
Weight of the child
0
0
1
2
3
up to 10 kg
up to 13 kg
9-18 kg
15-25 kg
22-36 kg
on page 22 first.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag» fig. 13 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
the side airbag that the airbag can provide as much protection as possible
» fig. 13 – .
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.

Read and observe
on page 22 first.
Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
0
up to 10 kg
0
up to 13 kg
1
9 - 18 kg
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
external
Rear seat
Centre
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
Group
2
15-25 kg
3
22-36 kg
a)
U
24
Safety
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
external
Rear seat
Centre
U
U
Ua)
U
U
Ua)
If the middle rear seat is not provided with a headrest, then a child seat from Group 2 or 3 is only to be
used if this has its own built-in headrest. If the child seat of Group 2 or 3 does not have its own built-in
headrest, the child seat must be attached to the outer rear seat.
Child seat category “Universal” - a child seat designed for fastening on
the seat itself using the seat belt.
Fastening elements
 is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely.

There are two fixing points between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of
the front passenger seat for fixing the  child seat in place with this system.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
25
25
26
Attachment points on the system
Use of child safety seats with the system
Locking points of the   system
On the rear outside seats, the fixing points are located below the upholstery.
The points are marked with labels with the  writing. » fig. 14.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  system.
■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the locking points intended for the installation of a child seat with the  system – risk of
death!
■
Attachment points on the  system
Fig. 14
Labels of the  system
Notice
A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fitted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of vehicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
■ Child seats with the  system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■
Use of child safety seats with the  system
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Overview of the usefulness of child seats using the  system on each of the seats, in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class of
the child seata)
Front passenger seatb)
Rear seats outside
Rear seat middle
0
up to 10 kg
E
X
IL-SU
X
0
up to 13 kg
E
D
C
X
IL-SU
X

Transporting children safely
25
Group
Size class of
the child seata)
Front passenger seatb)
Rear seats outside
Rear seat middle
1
9 - 18 kg
D
C
B
B1
A
X
IL-SU
IUF
X
-
X
IL-SU
X
-
X
IL-SU
X
2
15-25 kg
3
22-36 kg
a)
b)
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
If the front passenger seat is fitted with fixing points for the  system, this suits the installation of a  child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval.
IL-SU
IUF
X
The seat is suitable for the use of approved child seats in in the “Semi-Universal”category. The category “Semi-Universal” means that the child seat
with the  system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the information provided on the vehicle list which comes with the child seat.
The seat is suitable for the installation of a  child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the   system belt.
The seat is not fitted with attachment points for the  system.
Locking points of the   system
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
seat when installing and removing a child seat using the   system.
■ Only use child seats with the attachment points using the   system.
■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to an attachment point.
■
Fig. 15
Attachment points of the 
system
  represents a fastening system, which restricts movements of the
child seat shell.
The locking eyes A for attaching the belt of a child seat with the system are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » fig. 15.
26
Safety
Transporting children safely
27
Fig. 16 Cockpit example for LHD models
28
Using the system
24
Using the system
cockpit
25
Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Door opening lever
Electric exterior mirror adjustment
Air outlet vents
Parking ticket holder
Operating lever (depending on equipment):
▶ Direction and high beam
▶ Speed regulating system
Steering wheel with horn / with driver's front airbag
Buttons for operating the information system
Instrument cluster
Operating lever:
▶ Windscreen wipers and washers
▶ Information system
Warning light for the front seat passenger airbag
Button for hazard warning light system
Storage compartment
Interior rear-view mirror
Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Radio
▶ Infotainment
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Front passenger airbag
Electric window in the front passenger door
Electric windows
Storage compartment
Light switch
Bonnet release lever
Controller for instrument lighting and regulator for the headlight
beam range adjustment
Steering wheel locking lever
Depending on equipment fitted:
Ignition lock
Starter button
Bar with buttons (depending on the equipment fitted):
▶  START STOP
▶  Traction control TCS
▶  Electronic Stability Control ESC
▶  Parking assistant
▶  OFF ROAD mode
▶  Tyre control display
▶  Parking assistant
Handbrake lever
Central locking button
Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ 12-Volt power socket
▶ Cigarette lighter
Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Gearshift lever (manual gearbox)
▶ Gear selector lever (automatic gearbox)
Storage compartment
Controls for heating / air conditioning
Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment)
▶
▶
53
69
99
78
62
124
17
40
30
67
40
21
64
78
69
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
104
104
105
114
113
117
115
126
121
107
52
82
80
108
109
79
96
21
Notice
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in this layout» fig. 16.
84
17
57
57
79
61
145
31, 61
12
cockpit
29
▶
Instruments and warning lights
Instrument cluster

4
Introduction
5
6
7
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval1)
» page 46
▶ Show AdBlue range1) » page 41
Coolant temperature gauge » page 31
Display » page 40
Fuel gauge » page 31
Operation key:
▶ Reset the counter for distance driven (Trip) » page 40
▶ Setting the time
▶ Enable / disable the mode selected by using the 3 button
Tachometer
The Rev counter 1 » fig. 17 on page 30 shows the actual engine speed per
minute.
The beginning of the Rev counter’s red scale range indicates the maximum
permitted speed for an engine that has been driven-in and has reached operating temperature.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the tachometer is reached, or select mode D / S on the automatic gearbox.
Fig. 17 Instrument cluster
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Tachometer
Coolant temperature gauge
Fuel gauge
Illumination of the instrument cluster
Auto Check Control
Engine revolutions counter » page 30
with warning lights » page 33
Speedometer
▶ with warning lights » page 33
Operation button:
▶ setting the time » page 41
▶ Turn the second speedometer display on / off1) » page 41
1
▶
2
3
1)
Applies to vehicles with a segment display.
30
Using the system
30
31
31
31
32
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the optimum engine speed » page 41.
CAUTION
The tachometer pointer may only move into the red area for a short time - otherwise there is a risk of engine damage!
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 18
Coolant temperature gauge
WARNING
For the proper functioning of the vehicle system and thus safe navigation,
there must be enough fuel in the tank. Never drive with a completely empty fuel tank - there is risk of accidents!
CAUTION
Never drive with a completely empty fuel tank! Irregular supply of fuel can
cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the exhaust system.
The display» fig. 18 only works if the ignition is switched on.
Cold range - The pointer is in the range A , the engine has not yet reached its
operating temperature. Avoid high speeds and high engine loads.
Operating range - The pointer is in the range B .
Notice
After filling up, it’s possible that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves,
braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates a
fraction less.
Illumination of the instrument cluster
High temperature rangeThe pointer is in the range C . The coolant temperature is too high. The warning light» page 34illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
Fig. 20
Controller for the illumination of
the instrument cluster
Fuel gauge
Fig. 19
Fuel gauge
The brightness of the instrument cluster illumination can be individually adjusted when the dipped beam / parking light is on.
› to Brightness control of illumination Turn the controller of the instrument
cluster  » fig. 20.
The display» fig. 19 only works if the ignition is switched on.
The tank capacity is 55 litres or approximately 60 litres for Yeti 4x4.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve level A » fig. 19, the warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster» page 38.
Notice
On vehicles with MAXI DOT display, the brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically. A manual brightness adjustment can therefore only
have a limited effect.
Instruments and warning lights
31
If too much water is present in the separator, the following information appears on the instrument cluster display.
Auto Check Control
Vehicle condition
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a system failure,
there is the message displayed in the MAXI DOT display, along with indicator
lights if necessary, warning light illumination occurs in the instrument cluster
» page 33, Warning lights.
The menu item Vehicle status is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT display, whenever there is at least one error message. After selecting this menu,
the first of the error messages is displayed.
Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3.
This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being displayed.
Warning lights in the MAXI DOT display







 illuminates
 Water in fuel filter. Log book!
 FUEL FILTER SEE MANUAL
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Automatic DSG gearbox
 Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
▶
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
▶ If
the warning light does not go off, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage.
Engine oil pressure too low
» page 35
Check the engine oil level
engine oil sensor faulty
 /  AdBlue®level too low
The warning light  andis only shown in the MAXI DOT display.
» page 147
Further information on refilling AdBlue® can be shown in the display.
Engine-speed limitation
» page 32
Water in fuel filter (diesel engine)
» page 32
The range in the display indicates the distance that can be driven with the remaining AdBlue® left in the tank.
Automatic DSG gearbox overheated
» page 32
▶ Refill
AdBlue® level too low
» page 32
▶ Do not exceed the indicated maximum engine speed!
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek
assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
 Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine)
The fuel filter with water separator, filters out dirt and water from the fuel.
Using the system




AdBlue (DEF) refil! Range: ...
ADBLUE RANGE …
AdBlue® » page 144.
 AdBlue (DEF) refil! No engine start in …
ADBLUE NO START IN …
The range in the display indicates the distance that can be travelled, after
which no engine restart is possible, provided no AdBlue® is added.
 Engine speed limit
The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed in
conjunction with this warning light.
32
The warning light  is only shown in the MAXI DOT display.
▶ Refill


AdBlue® » page 144.
 AdBlue (DEF) refil! Engine start no longer possible.
ADBLUE NO RESTART
It is no longer possible to start the engine.
▶ Refill
AdBlue® » page 144.

WARNING
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning light system » page 64. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed distance.
Notice
If the MAXI DOT display shows warning messages, these messages must be
confirmed in order to access the main menu » page 42 .
■ As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the warning lights are always indicated again. After they are displayed for the first time, the warning
lights continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver.
■
Warning lights

38
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or
faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and notifications
in the instrument cluster display.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
 Handbrake
 Brake system
 Front seat belt warning light
 Generator
 Door open
 Coolant
 Boot lid
  Power steering / steering lock ( KESSY system)
  Engine oil
 Stability control (ESC) / Traction control (TCS)
 Traction control system (TCS) deactivated
 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
 Rear fog light
 Headlamp failure
 Xenon headlights (AFS)
 Emission control system
Preheating unit (Diesel engine)
 Control of the engine electronics (gasoline engine)
 Diesel particle filter (diesel)
 Fuel Reserve
Airbag system
 Tyre pressure
 Windscreen washer fluid level
  Turn signal system
 Fog lights
 Cruise control system
 Brake pedal (automatic transmission)
 OFF ROAD mode
 Main beam
 Display of a low temperature
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
38
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights illuminate briefly as a
function test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights
are extinguished a few seconds after switching on the ignition or leaving the
vehicle.
The warning lights are located at the following positions in the instrument
cluster » fig. 17 on page 30.
▶ Tachometer 1
▶ Speedometer 2
▶ Display 5
WARNING
Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions
displayed on instrument display board may lead to serious personal injury
or damage to the vehicle.
■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning light system » page 64. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed distance.
■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the engine compartment » page 144, Engine compartment.
■
Instruments and warning lights
33
 Handbrake

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – the hand brake is applied.
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h while the
handbrake is still on.
▶ Release
the handbrake.
Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – the brake fluid level in the braking system is too low.
▶ Park
the vehicle, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle’s braking distance There is a risk of an accident!
 Front seat belt warning light

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
At a speed of over 20 km/h the warning lightflashes and an audible warning
sounds at the same time.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next
approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning lightilluminates permanently.
 Generator

Read and observe
the vehicle battery during your journey, are all non-essential electrical
loads (e.g. Infotainment) must be switched off.
▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
34
Using the system

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
On vehicles with MAXI DOT display, this indicator is replaced by a vehicle icon
on the display » page 40.
 Coolant

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 lights up or flashes – the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low.
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine
▶ Check the coolant level » page 148, Checking and refilling.
to cool down.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light  illuminates again, there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
▶ Switch off the ignition.
▶ Check the fuse for the cooling
fan, replace if necessary.
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light illuminates
again, Stop driving!
▶ Seek
help from a specialist garage.
 Boot lid

on page 33 first.
 illuminates - while the engine is running, the battery is not being charged.
▶ As
 Door open
 illuminates – one or more doors are open.
 Brake system

CAUTION
If, in addition to the light,  the light illuminates,  stop driving - There is a
risk of damage to the motor! Switch off the engine and seek assistant from a
specialist garage.
Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates - the boot lid is open.
On vehicles with MAXI DOT display, this indicator is replaced by a vehicle icon
on the display » page 40.
  Power steering / steering lock ( KESSY system)

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
▶ You
Fault in the power steering
 lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the
steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces).
 illuminates - this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
steering forces may be greater.
▶ Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a
▶ If the warning light  does not go off, stop the vehicle, 
short distance.
Stop driving!. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
the warning lightdoes not go off, you can drive on, exercising appropriate
caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
▶ If
Steering column lock not unlocked (System KESSY)
 flashes - for vehicles with the KESSY system, the steering lock is not released.
▶ Move
the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating the unlocking of the steering lock.
▶ If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is
required.
Steering lock defect (KESSY system)
An audible signal is heard as a warning.
 flashes
 Steering column lock faulty.
▶ Park
the vehicle, do not continue to drive. After switching off the ignition,
it is no longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components (e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine. Seek help from a specialist garage.
 flashes
If, the indicator light does not go out after the engine is restarted and after a
short drive, then there is a system error.
 Steering lock: Workshop!
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
  Engine oil

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
Low oil pressure
 flashes
 Oil pressure: Turn engine off! Log book!
▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
▶ If the warning light flashes ,  do not drive any further!even if the oil
lev-
el is correct! Also do not leave the engine in idle mode.
▶ Seek help from a specialist garage.
Engine oil level too low
 illumi Check oil level!
nates
▶ Stop
the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
if necessary.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If the engine oil is not refilled, the warning light will come on again after
driving about 100 km.
Fault on the engine oil level sensor
 flashes
 Oil sensor: Workshop!
The warning light  flashes several times after switching on the ignition and
there is an audible signal.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
If, under the given conditions, it is not possible to top up with engine oil,
stop driving - there is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek
assistance from a specialist garage.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
Instruments and warning lights
35
 Stability control (ESC) / Traction control (TCS)

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
If your vehicle is equipped with the ESC system, the TCS is part of the ESC system.
 flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently being activated.
System fault
 illuminates – there is an ESC or TCS fault.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
If the warning light comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be
switched off for technical reasons.
▶ Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light  does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on,
the TCS is fully functional again.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system error.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
For more information on the ESC system» page 113 or TCS system» page 114.
 Traction control system (TCS) deactivated

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates - the TCS system is deactivated.
 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 lights up – there is an ABS fault.
36
Using the system
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without using the
ABS.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
If the warning light  illuminates simultaneously with warning light 
» page 34,  do not continue your journey! Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ A fault with the ABS system or the braking system can extend the vehicle's braking distance – risk of accident!
■
 Rear fog light

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates - the rear fog light is switched on.
 Headlamp failure

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – one of the vehicle's exterior lights is defective. A message will
appear in the display about the affected lamp.
 illuminates within a few seconds after switching on the ignition or when a
light with a faulty bulb is switched on.
 Xenon headlights (AFS)

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 flashes for 1 minute while driving or after the ignition is switched on - there
is a fault in the xenon headlight (AFS).
An error message is displayed in the MAXI DOT display.
Notice
With the Xenon headlight “tourist light” (travel mode) activated, the warning
light  flashes after switching on the ignition for 10 seconds.
 Emission control system

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Preheating unit (Diesel engine)

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates after the ignition has been switched on. Once the light has gone
out, the engine can be started immediately. There is a fault in the Preheating
system if the warning light  does not come on or if it illuminates continuously.
▶ Seek
help from a specialist garage.
 Diesel particle filter (diesel)

 illuminates - the filter is clogged with soot.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light goes out.
 4. or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: Position S).
 Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
 Engine speed between 1800-2500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light  goes out.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light  does not go out and
the warning light  begins to flash.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the weather, road, terrain
and traffic conditions.
■ The diesel particle filter reaches very high temperatures - this is a fire
hazard and could cause serious injury. Therefore, never stop the vehicle at
places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with
flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel
etc.
■
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
 Control of the engine electronics (gasoline engine)
Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
on page 33 first.
The diesel particle filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The
soot particles collect in the diesel particle filter where they are burnt on a regular basis.
 flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.

Read and observe
CAUTION
As long as the warning light  is illuminated, one must take into account
increased fuel consumption and power reduction in the engine.
■ Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce
the life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content.
■
Notice
We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This will improve the combustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter.
Instruments and warning lights
37
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
 Fuel Reserve

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approximately 9 litres).
An audible signal sounds as a warning.
▶ Please
refuel » page 141.
Notice
The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
Read and observe
on page 33 first.
System fault
 illuminates – there is a fault in the airbag system.
Error: Airbag

▶ Seek
help from a specialist garage.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
 illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
tool
 illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then
flashes for approximately 12 seconds.
Airbag/ belt tensioner deactivated.

WARNING
When there is a fault in the airbag system, there is a risk that the system
will not be triggered during an accident. Therefore, this must be checked
immediately by a specialized garage.
 Tyre pressure

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
Change of tyre pressure
 illuminates - there was a pressure change in one of the tyres.
38
Using the system
reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeuvres.
▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 153.
▶ Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the affected wheel
» page 157 or use the repair kit » page 161.
▶ Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 126.
System fault
 flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring system.
▶ Stop
 Airbag system

▶ Immediately
the car, switch the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light  flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system
error.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light  comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system error.
▶ You
can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Other incidents
The illumination of the warning light  can occur for the following reasons.
▶ The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly.
▶ The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
▶ Snow chains are mounted.
▶ A wheel was changed.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light  can be delayed or does not light up at all.
 Windscreen washer fluid level

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 flashes – the hill descent assistant is engaged at the moment.
 Main beam
 illuminates – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.

▶ Top
 illuminates - the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on.
up the windscreen washer fluid» page 146.
  Turn signal system

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 flashes - the left turn signal is switched on.
 flashes - the right turn signal is switched on.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice
its normal rate (does not apply when towing).
When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 Display of a low temperature

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – the outside temperature is below +4 °C.
WARNING
Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road
surface! You should therefore not only rely on the outside temperature display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road.
 Fog lights

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates - the fog lights are switched on.
 Cruise control system

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 lights up – the vehicle speed is regulated by the cruise control system.
 Brake pedal (automatic transmission)

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 lights up – apply the brake.
 OFF ROAD mode

Read and observe
on page 33 first.
 illuminates – the conditions for the engagement of OFF ROADmode are
met» page 115, OFF ROADmode.
Instruments and warning lights
39
information system
5
Driver information system

6
Introduction
7
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Display in the instrument cluster
Display of the second speedometer
Display of AdBlue range
Gear recommendation
40
41
41
41
41
Display in the instrument cluster
8
9
10
Door alarm
Service interval display
Outside temperature
Total distance travelled
Cruise control system
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Engaged/ recommended gear
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
Driving data (multi-function display - MFD)
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Total distance travelled / second speedometer display
Cruise control system
Service interval display
Information messages
Reset counter distance travelled counter (trip)
› Press button B » fig. 22 on page 41.
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm
MAXI DOT Display - When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open,
a warning indicator appears in the display. An acoustic signal will also sound if
you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a door is open.
Segment display - with the door or tailgate open,the warning light  or. 
illuminates in the instrument cluster. An acoustic signal will also sound if you
drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a door is open.
Fig. 21 Display types: MAXI DOT / Segment display
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the display in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » fig. 21.
Compass display1)
Engaged/ recommended gear
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
Warning lights of the START-STOP system
Time
Driving data (multi-function display - MFD)
Indicator lights
Information messages
1
2
3
4
1)
Applies to vehicles with a factory-installed navigation system.
40
Using the system
CAUTION
Remove the ignition key when making contact with the display (. E.g. when
cleaning) (on vehicles with the KESSY system switch off the ignition and open
the driver door) - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the display.
Fig. 22
Buttons in the instrument cluster
MAXI DOT display
The display of AdBlue range is part of the multi-function display » page 43,
Data overview.
Segment display
› Press button A
» fig. 22 on page 41 repeatedly until the AdBlue Range appears instead of the odometer.
› Wait around 5 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting.
Gear recommendation
The time is set using the buttons A and B » fig. 22.
A The choice to change the display (hours or minutes).
B Change of the displayed value.
In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display, it is also possible to set the
Time in the Time menu » page 45, Menu item settings.
Display of the second speedometer
The current speed can also be displayed in mph 1). This feature is provided for
driving in countries with different speed units.
MAXI DOT display
The display of the second speedometer can be activated in the Alt. speed dis.
menu item » page 45, Menu item settings.
Segment display
› Press button A » fig. 22 on page 41repeatedly, until the odometer display
flashes.
› Press the B key while the display flashes.
The second speedometer is displayed instead of the odometer. Switching off
the display of the second speedometer can be done in the same manner as
switching on.
Display of AdBlue range
The display shows the distance in km that can still be driven with the remaining AdBlue tank capacity.
1)
Fig. 23 Information on the selected gear / Gear recommendation
A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is displayed, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
efficiency.
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
shown provided the manual switching mode (Tiptronic) is selected.
Display
MAXI DOT display » fig. 23
 Optimal gear engaged
 Recommended gear (e.g.means that it is advantageous to switch from
3. to 4. gear)
Segment display » fig. 23
 Optimal gear engaged
 Recommended gear
 - Recommends that you change up to a higher gear

For models with the speedometer in mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
information system
41
 - Recommends that you change down to a lower gear
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, the recommended gear and an arrow symbol is displayed (e.g.   means that it is advantageous to switch
from a lower gear to 4. gear).
▶ For vehicles with an automatic gearbox mode the currently engaged
gear and an arrow symbol (e.g.   means that it is advantageous to
switch from 4 to a higher gear) is displayed in manual shifting mode
(Tiptronic).
▶
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations (e.g. when overtaking).
Fig. 25 Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Operation of the information system
Operation via the operating lever
Fig. 24
Buttons on the control lever
Operating the multifunction display
A Press (up or down) - Select data / Setting values
B Press Show / confirm entry
Operating the MAXI DOT display
A Press (up or down) - move to the selected menu
Hold (up or down) - display main menu
B Press - confirm selected menu item
42
Using the system
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
 PressChange frequency range (e.g. FM/AM/DAB) / Switch audio source
(e.g. SD card/USB input)
A Turn - sets the volume
Press - sound on / off
 Skip to next track/station
 Switch to previous track/station
 Switch on/off voice control
 Press - display the phone menu; accept call/ hang up; call selected contact
Hold - repeat last call; reject call
Operating the multifunction display
B Turn - select data / set values
Press Show / confirm entry
Operating the MAXI DOT display
 Hold - display main menu
Press - return to a previous level in the menu
B Turn - move in the selected menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Notice
Depending on equipment not all functions may be available. Based on this, the
system indicates this via a text message on the display.
AdBlue® range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing
AdBlue®tank capacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value can increase.
Multifunction display (MFD)

Introduction
Distance driven - Distance driven since the memory was last cleared.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Data overview
Warning when exceeding the set speed
Memory
43
43
44
The driving data is displayed on the multifunction display. After the ignition is
switched on, the function that was last selected before switching off the ignition is displayed.
If vehicles with MAXI DOTdisplay do not show the driving data after switching
on the ignition, select the menu item MFD in the main menu and confirm
» page 44, MAXI DOT display.
On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display, there is an option to fade out the units
and some of the information » page 45, Menu item settings.
Notice
If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is not
indicated in km/h on the display.
Data overview
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment).
Outside temperatureFor vehicles with a MAXI DOT display this information is
always shown.
Driving time - Driving time since last clearing the memory.
Current fuel consumption - When the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly,
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (in models in some countries the following appears --,- km/l).
Average fuel consumption - Is calculated continuously since the last time that
the memory was erased. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the
first 300 m driven.
Range - Drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank capacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value
can increase.
Average speed - Value constantly recalculated, for distance since last clearing
the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m
driven.
Current Speed - Digital speedometer.
Oil temperatureif the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in
the system for checking the oil temperature, thesymbols are displayed.
Speed warning when the preset speed is exceededallows the setting of a
speed limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message appears on the display of the instrument cluster.
Warning when exceeding the set speed
The system offers the option to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic
warning signal will sound and the following warning message (MAXI DOT Display) and the symbol (Segment display) appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
› Select the menu item Speed warning at()  () and confirm.
› Set the desired speed limit.
› Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
› Select the menu item Speed warning at () or () and confirm.
› Drive at the desired speed.
› Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
Reset speed limit
› Select the menu item Speed warning at () or  () and confirm.
› By confirming the speed stored in the memory, the speed limit is reset.
The set driving mode remains stored even after switching the ignition on and
off.
information system
43
Notice
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
Memory
Fig. 26
Multi-function display - memory display
MAXI DOT display

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
The system stores data from the two memories described below, which are
then displayed at position A » fig. 26.
“1” - Single-trip memory
Driving data is stored from when the ignition is switched on to when it is
switched off. If the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition, new data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
“2” - Long-term memory
The memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up to a total
of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1999 kilometres driven (), and up to a total of
99 hours and 59 minutes or 9999 kilometres driven ().
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is
exceeded.
› To choose the memory bank, confirm the selected indication again and select the desired memory.
› To delete the memory bank of the chosen selection, hold down the button
confirming the selection.
The following driving data is stored in different memory banks.
▶ Average fuel consumption.
▶ Distance driven.
▶ Average speed.
▶ Driving time
Menu itemNavigation
Menu itemAudio
Menu itemPhone
Menu itemAssistants
Menu item settings
The MAXI DOT display is a user interface which, depending on the equipment
configuration, provides information about Infotainment, the multifunction display, the assistance systems etc. Furthermore, it enables some other functions
of your vehicle to be set.
The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on
the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 42.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
■ MFD (Multifunction display) » page 43
■ Audio » page 45
■ Navigation » page 44
■ Phone » page 45;
■ Aux. heating » page 100
■ Assistants » page 45
■ Vehicle status » page 32
■ Settings » page 45
Notice
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must be verified to access the main menu.
■ The menu always shifts to one of the higher levels in a menu after 10 seconds if the display is not currently active.
■
Menu itemNavigation
The following information is displayed in the Navigation menu item.
44
Using the system
44
45
45
45
45

▶ Driving recommendations
▶ Compass
▶ Last destinations
Menu itemAudio
The following information is displayed in the Audio menu item.
Radio
▶ Station currently being played (name/frequency).
▶ The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the station button (e.g. FM 3), if the station is stored in the memory list.
▶ List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
▶ TP traffic announcements.
Media
▶ Name
of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
tag on the audio source.
Menu item settings
There is a possibility to change certain settings using the display. The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle).
Language Setting the language for the texts shown on the display.
MFD DataSwitching on/off certain information shown on the multifunction display.
ConvenienceTurn on / off or adjust the following functions.
ATA confirm
Central locking
Window op.
Menu itemPhone
The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the Phone menu item.
 Incoming call
 Outgoing call
 Missed call
Symbols on the display
 Charge status of the telephone battery1)
 Signal strength1)
 A phone is connected to the device
 Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown
next to the symbol)
Menu itemAssistants
In the menu item Assistants , the fatigue detection function is enabled / disabled» page 125.
Mirror down
Mirror adjust.
Factory setting.
Lights & VisionTurn on / off or adjust the following functions.
Coming Home
Leaving Home
Dayt. r. light
1)
Switch on/off the audible signal indicating activation
of the anti-theft alarm system» page 54, Anti-theft
alarm system.
Switch on/off the central locking and automatic locking function» page 52, Individual settings.
Setting the comfort controls for the driver window or
for all windows » page 58, Window convenience operation.
Activate/deactivate the function for mirror lowering
on the front passenger side when reversing» page 70, Tilting the mirror area of the front
passenger mirror (vehicles with electrically adjustable
driver's seat).
Activation / deactivation of the synchronous exterior
mirror function settings » page 69, Setting the mirror surfaces synchronously.
Resetting the Convenience menu item to the factory
setting.
Activate/deactivate and adjust the light duration of
the COMING HOME function» page 63.
Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the
LEAVING HOME function» page 63.
Activate/deactivate the daylight driving light function» page 61, Daylight driving lights (DAY LIGHT).

This function is only supported by some mobile phones.
information system
45
Rear wiper
Lane ch. flash
Travel mode
Factory setting.
Activate/deactivate the function of the automatic
rear window wiping» page 68, Automatic rear wiper.
Activate/deactivate the comfort indicating function» page 62, Comfort signalling.
Activate/deactivate the travel mode feature» page 64.
Resetting the menu item Lights & Vision to the factory
settings.
CoastingEnable / disable the idle position (coasting) for vehicles with automatic
transmission » page 111, Driving in neutral (“coasting”).
TimeSetting the time, the time format (24 or 12 hour) and changing summer /
winter time.
Winter TyresSetting of the speed and the switching on and off of the acoustic
signals when exceeding this speed. This function is, for example, used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum
speed of the vehicle » page 152, Wheels and tyres. When the set speed limit
is exceeded, an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in
the information display.
UnitsSetting of the units for temperature, consumption and distance travelled.
AssistantsAdjustment of the sound for Park Assist» page 117, Parking assistance (ParkPilot).
Alt. speed dis. Turn on / off the display of the second speedometer in
mph1)» page 41, Display of the second speedometer.
ServiceDisplay of the distance travelled and display for the days until the next
service date» page 46, Service interval display.
Factory setting. - Resetting the display functions to the factory settings.
1)
For models with the speedometer in mph, the second speed is displayed in km/h.
46
Using the system
Service interval display

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Prompts appear in the MAXI DOT display
Prompt appears in the segment display
Resetting Service Interval Display
46
47
47
The service interval display shows the kilometres or days until the next service
event.
Information regarding service intervals » page 135.
Prompts appear in the MAXI DOT display
Messages before reaching the scheduled service date
Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol as well as a message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the display after switching on the ignition.
Messages upon reaching scheduled service date
Once the service interval is reached, a message appears in the display after the
ignition is switched on.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
You can view the remaining distance and days until the next service date at
any time when the ignition is switched on by going to the Service menu item
» page 45, Menu item settings or from the Vehicle status in the main menu of the
MAXI DOTdisplay.» page 44 .
Prompt appears in the segment display
Fig. 27
Segment display: Example of a
message
Resetting Service Interval Display
We recommend that this reset is completed by a specialist garage.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. Incorrectly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehicle.
Variable Service Interval
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change service display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are displayed, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
Explanation of graphic » fig. 27
 Service due
A Differentiating between types of service
▶  - Oil change service
▶  - Inspection
B  Days remaining until the next service interval
C Kilometres remaining until the next service interval
Messages before reaching the scheduled service date
Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol as well as a message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the display for approx. 10 seconds after switching on the ignition» fig. 27.
Messages upon reaching scheduled service date
As soon as the due date for the service is reached, the flashing symbol  and
the message appears in the display for about 20 seconds after the ignition has
been switched on.
Displaying the distance travelled and days until the next service date
Messages regarding the kilometres travelled and days until the next service
can be displayed with the ignition at any time by pressing the button A again
» fig. 22 on page 41.
The following is shown in the display» fig. 27 (First information on the Oil
Change Service, and then information on inspection by pressing the A button
again » fig. 22 on page 41 ).
These values are then continuously matched according to the vehicle’s current
operating conditions.
SmartGate
Introduction to the subject
Fig. 28
QR code with reference to the
ŠKODA websites
SmartGate constitutes a system that transmits certain driving data (such as
fuel consumption, speed or similar) by means of Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct.
The ŠKODA applications installed in a supported external device (e.g. Phone,
tablet) give the option to further transmit the received data.
Some ŠKODA applications can be displayed in the Infotainment display by
means of a SmartLinkconnection » Owner's Manual Infotainment.
Read in the QR code» fig. 28 using the respective application on your external
deviceor enter the following address in the web browser to open the website
with an overview of the available applications, compatible devices and other
information about SmartGate.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartgate

information system
47
CAUTION
To increase the access security to the transmitted vehicle data, once the
ŠKODA application start, you are asked to change the password/PIN code if
the default password/PIN code has not yet been changed» page 49, Password/PIN code. Without this change, it is not possible to start theŠKODAApplication.
■ ŠKODA accepts no responsibility for any problems caused by incompatibility
or improper functioning of the external devices.
■
connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi
This type of connection is intended for external devices running Android and
iOS operating systems.
Connecting to an Android external device
› Switch on the ignition.
› Switch on Wi-Fi in the external device that is to be connected and search for
available Wi-Fi networks (see Owner's Manual for the external device).
› In the menu of the detected networks select from the menu
item“SmartGate_...”1).
› Enter the password (vehicle identification number using upper-case letters» page 49).
› In the external device that is to be connected to, start the SmartGate application.
› Then follow the instructions which are included in the SmartGate application.
With SmartGate, a maximum of four external devices can be connected simultaneously using Wi-Fi, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as required.
Connecting to an external iOS device
› Switch on the ignition.
› Switch on Wi-Fi in the external device that is to be connected and search for
available Wi-Fi networks (see Owner's Manual for the external device).
› In the menu of the detected networks select from the menu
item“SmartGate_...”1).
› Enter the password (vehicle identification number using upper-case letters» page 49).
With SmartGate, a maximum of four external devices can be connected simultaneously using Wi-Fi. In these external devices, up to four ŠKODA applications
can be started simultaneously.
1)
At the position ... the last six symbols of the vehicle identification number are displayed.
48
Using the system
Disconnection
Disconnection is possible in one of the following ways.
› Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
› End the connection in the SmartGate application.
› Switch off Wi-Fi in the connected external device.
Automatic connection
If the communication device has already had a connection with SmartGate,
then the connection is automatically restored under the following conditions.



The ignition is switched on.
Wi-Fi is switched on in the external device that is to be connected to.
The external device that is to be connected to stores the password required for the connection check.
Connection to SmartGate using direct Wi-Fi
This type of connection is intended for external devices running the Android
operating system.
Connection set-up
› Switch on the ignition.
› In the external device that is to be connected to, start the SmartGate application.
› In the application, change the connection type to Wi-Fi direct.
› Then follow the instructions which are included in the SmartGate application.
The password for the connection to SmartGate _...1) includes the last six digits
of the vehicle identification number » page 49.
With SmartGate, a maximum of two external devices can be connected simultaneously using Wi-Fi direct, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as required.
If you want to connect to SmartGate in a different vehicle, you must make a
new connection in the SmartGate application.
Disconnection
Disconnection is possible in one of the following ways.

› Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
› End the connection in the SmartGate application.
› Switch off Wi-Fi in the connected external device.
Notice
If you have forgotten your password for connecting to SmartGate, SmartGate
must be reset to factory settings in a specialised workshop.
Automatic connection
If the external device once had a connection with SmartGate, then the connection is automatically restored after the ignition is started.
SmartGate web interface
In the SmartGateInterface -SmartGateParameters can be set.
The following address must be entered in the web browser of the external device that is connected with SmartGate.
HTTP://192.168.123.1
The setting changes are only effective after pressing the buttons “Save” →
“Reboot”.
Password/PIN code
The password for the Wi-Fi connection preset by the factory is the complete
vehicle identification number (entered in upper case); the PIN code for the WiFi direct connection is the last 6 digits of the vehicle identification number.
After changing the password/PIN, the connection to SmartGate must be re-established on the external device to be connected using the new password or
new PIN code.
Change password for the Wi-Fi connection
› Open the SmartGate web interface » page 49, SmartGate web interface.
› In the menu item “WPA / WPA2 key:” enter the new password (8 to 63 alphanumeric, special, lower and upper case characters).
› Confirm he password by pressing the button “Save”.
› Restart SmartGate by tapping on the interface “Reboot” .
1)
PIN code change for the Wi-Fi Direct connection
› Open the SmartGate web interface » page 49, SmartGate web interface.
› In the“WiFi Direct PIN:”menu item, enter the new PIN code (6 digits).
› Confirm the PIN code change by tapping on the interface “Save”.
› Restart SmartGate by tapping on the interface “Reboot” .
1)
1)
If the button “Reboot” is not displayed, then the Web browser display must be restored manually.
information system
49
CAUTION
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
■ Keep the key grooves clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
Unlocking and opening
■
Unlocking and locking

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Unlocking/locking with the key in the lock cylinder
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Unlocking/locking - KESSY
Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button
SafeLock
Individual settings
Opening/closing door
Child safety lock
Malfunctions
Unlocking/locking with the key in the lock cylinder
50
51
51
52
52
52
53
53
54
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 52.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically.
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once.
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
If the doors or the boot remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorised persons (e.g. children) could lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition or
start the engine - There is a risk of injury and accidents!
■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or help themselves.
Very high or very low temperatures can be fatal!
■
50
Using the system
Fig. 29
Left side of the vehicle: Turning
the key for unlocking and locking
the vehicle

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » fig. 29
 Unlocking the vehicle
 Locking the vehicle
CAUTION
If the locking cylinder is provided with a cap» page 167, to unlock / lock the
vehicle with key, the cap must be removed beforehand.
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Unlocking/locking - KESSY
Fig. 30
Key with pop-out key bit

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
Description of the key » fig. 30
 Unlock button
 Lock button
 Button to lock/unlock the boot lid
A Button for popping out/pushing in the key bit
B Battery status warning light - if the warning light does not flash when you
press a button on the key, the battery is discharged
Unlocking / locking the boot lid
By pressing lightly on the buttonthe lid is unlocked.
Bypressing downon the buttonthe lid is unlocked and unlatched (partopened).
If the lid is unlocked or released with the button , then the lid is automatically locked after closing. The period of time after which the flap is locked can
be set » page 56.
CAUTION
■ The remote control may be affected by signal superimposition by transmitters close to the car.
■ The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be replaced if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of
less than 3 m away » page 166.
Fig. 31 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
› Grip the door handle tounlock » fig. 31the vehicle.
› Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger tolock» fig. 31 - the
vehicle.
When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance
of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
Information on locking
On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be
moved into the position P before unlocking.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside if the ignition has not been
turned off.
After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds by
using the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is locked.
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle
If one of the doors is only closed after locking of the vehicle and the key remains, with which the vehicle has been locked, the vehicle is automatically unlocked in the passenger compartment. After automatically unlocking, the turn
signal lights will flash four times. If a door is not opened within approximately
45 seconds, the vehicle is automatically locked again.
Unlocking and opening
51

If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatically unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal
lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened);
the other doors remain locked.
CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sensors in the door handle.
Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button
Fig. 32
Central locking button
SafeLock

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
SafeLock prevents the doors from behind opened from inside as well as window operation. This makes an attempted break-in to the vehicle more difficult.
Switching on
SafeLock is activated when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
This function is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instrument cluster after the ignition is switched off.
 Observe SAFE locking! Log book!
 CHECK DEADLOCK
Activation display
When SafeLock is activated the warning light in the driver's door flashes for 2
seconds in quick succession, then starts to flash at longer intervals.
Switching off
▶ By locking twice within 2 seconds.
▶ or: by deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection
» page 55.

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
Conditions for the locking/unlocking using the central locking button.
 The vehicle is not locked from the outside.
 None of the doors are open.
› To lock, press the  button » fig. 32 in the area.
Locking is displayed in the button by the illumination of the symbol.
› To unlock, press the button  in the area.
The following is true after locking.
▶ Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
▶ The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
WARNING
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – dangerous!
52
Using the system
The warning light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds, then
goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
The Safelock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the safe securing system is activated, people cannot
remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or
open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for
rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk of death!
Individual settings

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
The following central locking functions can be individually set via the MAXI
DOT display » page 45, Menu item settings.

All doors
The function allows you to unlock all doors, the luggage compartment lid and
the fuel filler flap.
Single door
The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door
which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors
and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or
touched.
Doors on a vehicle side
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the
fuel filler flap, using the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking
of both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap.
The other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or touched.
Automatic locking/unlocking
This function enables the locking of all doors and the boot lid from a speed of
15 km/h. Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
› To open from the outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle A
in
the direction of arrow » fig. 33.
› To open from the inside pull the door opening lever B and push the door
away from you.
› To the lock from the inside grab handle C and close the door.
WARNING
The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst the vehicle is in motion - There is a risk to life!
■ Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
range – There is a risk of injury!
■ Never drive with the doors open - it can be fatal!
■ An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on a slope– risk of injury!
■
Child safety lock
The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the
ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on
the individual setting for the central locking system).
Opening/closing door
Fig. 34 Rear door: Switching the child safety system on/off

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Fig. 33 Door handle/door opening lever
› Toturn on the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position » fig. 34.
› Toturn off the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position.
Unlocking and opening
53
Malfunctions

Read and observe
and
on page 50 first.
Synchronising remote
If the buttons on the remote control key have been depressed several times
beyond the effective range of the equipment or the battery has been replaced
in the remote control key and the vehicle cannot be unlocked with the remote
control, the key must be synchronised.
› Press any button on the remote control key.
› After pressing the button means the door will unlock with the key above the
lock cylinder within 1 minute.
Fault with the central locking
If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 seconds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
A failure in the central locking system can lead the vehicle doors and the boot
lid can emergency lock or emergency release » page 167.
Failure of the KESSY system
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace
the battery » page 166.
Anti-theft alarm system

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Alarm trigger
Interior monitor and towing protection
54
55
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to only as alarm).
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after unlocking.
54
Using the system
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, you must check that all the windows, doors and the
sliding/tilting roof are locked, in order to ensure the full functionality of the anti-theft alarm system.
Notice
The alarm system has its own power source, the service life of which is 5 years.
Alarm trigger

Read and observe
on page 54 first.
The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is activated on the vehicle with an activated warning system.
▶ Opening the bonnet.
▶ Opening the luggage compartment lid.
▶ Opening the doors.
▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock.
▶ Towing the vehicle.
▶ Movement in the vehicle.
▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop in the electrical system.
▶ Uncoupling the trailer.
An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by
the lock cylinder.
The alarm is switched off by pressing thebutton on the key or switching on
the ignition.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Fig. 35
Button for interior monitor and
towing protection
Luggage compartment lid

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
55
56
Open/close boot lid
Delayed locking of the boot lid
WARNING
Never drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar
otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of
poisoning!
■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – There is a risk of an accident!
■ Make sure that when closing the luggage compartment lid, no body parts
are crushed - there is danger of injury!
■ Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment
lid, it could crack – There is a risk of injury!
■

Read and observe
on page 54 first.
The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then
triggers the alarm.
The anti-towing protection detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers
the alarm.
Both systems should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm will
be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed.
Open/close boot lid
Deactivation
› Switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
› Press the button on the centre column on the driver side» fig. 35,the
symbol illuminates in the button.
› Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
Disabling the two systems switches off SafeLock.
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle.
Fig. 36 Opening / closing tailgate

Read and observe
on page 55 first.
› To open the lid, press button A in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 36.
› Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› To close, grab the mount B and pull in the direction of arrow 3 .
Unlocking and opening

55
WARNING
Always close the window carefully and in a controlled manner. Otherwise
these could cause severe crushing injuries.
■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 57. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several
centimetres. The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of
injury!
Notice
Button A » fig. 36is disabled when starting off or driving at a speed of over 5
km/h. The button is reactivated when the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
■
Delayed locking of the boot lid

Read and observe
on page 55 first.
If the boot lid is unlocked with the buttonon the key, then the boot lid is
automatically locked after closing.
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the luggage compartment lid is locked automatically.
Notice
If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle
and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds.
Mechanical window lifters
Window operation

CAUTION
Keep the windows clean (free of ice and similar) to ensure the correct functionality of the electric windows.
■ Always close the electric windows before disconnecting the battery.
■
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Mechanical window lifters
Electric Windows
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors
Force limiter
Window convenience operation
Operational faults
56
57
57
57
58
58
The window can be operated mechanically by means of the attached handle
on each door panel.
The windows can be operated electrically from the following locations; all windows from the driver's seat and also via the buttons for the windows in the
passenger door or the rear doors.
56
Using the system
Fig. 37 Window operation: Left / Right

Read and observe
and
on page 56 first.
› To open, turn the crank in the direction of arrow
› To close, turn the crank in the direction of arrow
A » fig. 37.
B.
Electric Windows
Notice
After switching off the ignition, the windows can still open and close for
about 10 minutes.
■ After the driver or front passenger door is opened, the operation of the window is only possible with the button A » fig. 38, in which case this is pressed
or pulled for approx. 2 seconds.
■
Fig. 38
Buttons for window levers
Opening the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear
doors

Read and observe
and
Fig. 39
Button for the window lifter
on page 56 first.
All windows can be operated from the driver's seat. The window in the front
passenger door and the windows in the rear doors are operated via the button
in each door.
Electric window buttons » fig. 38
A Left front door
B Right front door
C Left rear door
D Left rear door:
E Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be
advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats)
› To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win-
dow has moved into the desired position.
› or: press the button to the stop, the window automatically opens fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
› To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold
until the window has moved into the desired position.
› or: pull the button briefly to the stop, the window automatically closes fully.
Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop.
› To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press the E button. If
the buttons in the rear doors are deactivated, the warning light illuminates
in the E button.

Read and observe
and
on page 56 first.
There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that
window.
› To open, lightly press the appropriate button underneath and hold it until
the window has moved into the desired position.
› or: press the buttonunderneath to the stop, the window automatically opens
fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
› To close, push the corresponding button above briefly and hold until the window has moved into the desired position.
› or: press the button above briefly, the window automatically opens fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
Force limiter

Read and observe
and
on page 56 first.
The electric windows are fitted with a force limiter.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
Unlocking and opening

57
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
Read and observe
and
on page 56 first.
The convenience operation for the window offers the option to open/close all
the windows at once (or only the window in the driver's door). Setting up, activating an deactivating the window convenience operation is carried out in the
MAXI DOT display in the Window op. menu item. » page 45.
Opening
› Press and hold the button on the key.
› Or Hold the key in the unlock position in the driver's door lock.
› Or:Hold the central locking button in the area of the symbol  » fig. 32 on
page 52 .
› Or Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key
A until it
stops in the open position » fig. 38 on page 57.
Closing
› Press and hold the button on the key.
› Or Hold the key in the lock position in the driver's door lock.
› Or:Hold the central locking button in the area of the symbol  » fig. 32 on
page 52 .
› Or Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it
stops in the closed position » fig. 38 on page 57.
› In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the
front door handle » fig. 31 on page 51.
The convenience operation will only function correctly if all the windows automatically open/close properly.
58
Using the system
The window stops moving immediately when the corresponding button is released.
Operational faults

Read and observe
and
on page 56 first.
Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate
the window again as soon as the operating mechanism has cooled down.
The electric windows are deactivated after the vehicle battery has been disconnected. After connecting the vehicle battery, the system is activated as follows.
Window convenience operation

Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's door
locking cylinder is only possible within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.
Window in the driver door
› Switch on the ignition.
› Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
› Release the button.
› Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
Windows in the other doors
› Switch on the ignition.
› Press the respective key above and close the window.
› Release the button.
› Pull up the respective button above and hold for 1 second.
Panorama sliding/tilting roof

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
Power limit
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof
Activate operation of the tilt / slide sunroof
Sunshade with electric operation
Activating operation of the sunshade
59
59
59
59
60
60 
The panoramic tilt / slide sunroof (hereafter referred to as tilt / slide sunroof)
can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor
temperature is above -20 °C.
The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. After opening the driver or front passenger door, it
is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
WARNING
When operating the tilt/slide sunroof and the sunshade, proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries – There is a risk of injury!
CAUTION
During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow from the
vicinity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to
the opening mechanism.
■ Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
■
Operation
After turning the switch one stop to position (spring-tensioned position),
the tilt / slide sunroof stops in the position in which the intensity of the wind
noise is low. After turning the switch further to position , the tilt / slide sunroof opens up to the stop.
Power limit

Read and observe
and
on page 59 first.
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the glass pane retracts by several centimetres.
WARNING
If the tilt / slide sunroof is closed, by pulling on the recess of the switch in
the direction of arrow 2 ,» fig. 40 on page 59 and the closing process is hindered by an obstacle, then at the third attempt at closing, the force limitation will cease to function (if less than 5 s passes between the individual
attempts to close). The tilt / slide sunroof closes with full force - There is a
risk of injury.
Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof

Read and observe
and
on page 59 first.
The comfort operation makes it possible to open or close the sliding/tilting
roof using the key or the KESSY system via the sensor in the front door handle.
Fig. 40 Operation of the sliding/tilting roof

Read and observe
and
on page 59 first.
Operation of the sliding/tilting roof » fig. 40
 Open fully
 Open to the low-noise position
A Open partially
 Close completely
1 Opening (switch in position )
2 Closing (switch in position )
› To open out, press and hold the button on the key.
› Or Hold the key in the unlock position in the driver's door lock.
› To close, press and hold the button on the key. In the KESSY system, hold
your finger on the sensor on the outside of the front door handle » fig. 31 on
page 51.
› Or Hold the key in the lock position in the driver's door lock.
By interrupting the locking of the closing operation is interrupted.
Activate operation of the tilt / slide sunroof

Read and observe
and
on page 59 first.
If the tilt / slide sunroof stops working (e.g. after disconnecting and connecting

the battery), then the operation must be reactivated.
Unlocking and opening
59
› Turn on the ignition and set the switch to position » fig. 40 on page 59.
› Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards.
Lights and visibility
The tilt / slide sunroof opens and closes again after around 10 seconds.
Lights
› Release the lever.

Sunshade with electric operation
Fig. 41
Button for operating the sunshade

Read and observe
and
on page 59 first.
Operation of the sunblind » fig. 41
 Open - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
 Close - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
The sunshade can also be operated by pressing and holding the appropriate
button (starts movement of the sunshade) and releasing it when the sunshade
reaches the desired position.
Activating operation of the sunshade

Read and observe
and
on page 59 first.
If the operation of sunshade has malfunctioned (e.g. after disconnecting and
connecting the battery), then the operation will have to be activated.
› Turn on the ignition and set the switch to position » fig. 41 on page 60.
› Press and hold the button .
The sunshade opens and closes again after around 10 seconds.
› Release the button.
60
Using the system
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operating the lights
Daylight driving lights (DAY LIGHT)
Turn signal and main beam
Automatic driving light control
Xenon headlight
Fog lights/rear fog light
Fog lights with the CORNER function
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Hazard warning light system
Parking lights
Driving abroad
61
61
62
62
62
63
63
63
64
64
64
The lights work only with the ignition on, unless otherwise stated.
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in this layout» fig. 42 on page 61.
WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control  serves only as a support and does
not relieve the driver from his responsibility to check the light and, if necessary, to switch on the light depending on the given light conditions.
Notice
The headlights may mist up from the inside. When the light is switched on, the
light-emitting surface demists after a short period of time.
Operating the lights
Notice
If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
automatically switch off1) and the parking lights will come on. The parking
lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed (for vehicles with the
KESSY system, after opening the driver's door).
■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam illuminates automatically.
■
Fig. 42
Light switch and control dial for
the headlight beam range regulation
Daylight driving lights (DAY LIGHT)


Read and observe
on page 60 first.
To switch on/off the lights, turn the A » fig. 42 switch to one of the following
positions (equipment-dependent).
Switching off lights (except Dayt. r. light)

 Automatic switching lights on and off » page 62
 Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 64
 Switching on the low beam
To adjust the headlight range control, turn dial B » fig. 42in line with the vehicle load » .
 Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compartment loaded

Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment loaded

The Xenon headlights feature no manual headlight range control. After
switching on the ignition, adjust these automatically to the load and driving
condition of the vehicle.
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions - otherwise there is a risk of an accident.
■ The vehicle should not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehicles.
■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
1)
Read and observe
on page 60 first.
The daytime driving lights (hereinafter referred to only function)ensure the
lighting of the front and also the rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries).
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met:
 The light switch is in the position  or .
 The ignition is switched on.
 The function is activated.
Function for vehicles with MAXI DOT display disable / enable
The function menu item Dayt. r. light can be deactivated / activated » page 45,
Menu item settings.
Disable function for vehicles with segment display
› Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator / main beam lever towards the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position.
› Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible signal sounds (about 3 s).
Enable function for vehicles with segment display
› Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator / main beam lever towards the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position.
› Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible signal sounds (about 3 s).
WARNING
Therefore always switch on the low beam if visibility is poor.
Does not apply to the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME function
» page 63.
Lights and visibility
61
Turn signal and main beam
Automatic driving light control
Fig. 43
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation

Read and observe
on page 60 first.
Control stalk positions » fig. 43
 Switch on the right turn signal
 Switch on left turn signal
 Switch on main beam (spring-tensioned position)
 Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded
position)
Fig. 44
Light switch : AUTO position

Read and observe
on page 60 first.
The light switch is in position  » fig. 44 then depending on the equipment
the lights automatically switch on / off corresponding to the light or weather
conditions (rain).
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
Automatic driving light control during rain
The low beam is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met:
 The light switch is in the position .
 The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s.
The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off.
The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
The turn signal switches off automatically, depending on the steering angle
after completing the turn.
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a motor mounted below the windscreen in the
holder of the interior mirror sensor. Do not cover the sensor - the system can
be affected.
Comfort signalling
When the operating lever is pressed lightly up or down, the indicator in question flashes three times.
Comfort signalling can be activated / deactivated via the Maxi DOT display in
the Lane ch. flash» page 45, Menu item settings menu item.
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.
Xenon headlight

Read and observe
on page 60 first.
The Xenon headlights (hereinafter referred to as just system) use the driving
data to automatically ensure the for the best possible light cone in front of the
vehicle.
The system will automatically operate in the following modes: urban, extra-urban, motorway, rain, adjusting the lighting direction of the headlights for road
illumination on bends.
The system works as long as the light switch is in position .
62
Using the system

WARNING
If there is a system malfunction the headlights are automatically lowered
to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. This reduces the beam of light in front of the vehicle. Seek help from
a specialist garage.
Fog lights/rear fog light
Fig. 45
Light switch: switch on fog
lights / rear fog light switch
Fog lights with the CORNER function

Read and observe
on page 60 first.
The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respective side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering), if the following conditions are
met.
 The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply 1).
 The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
 The low beam is switched on.
 The fog lights are not switched on.
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME


Read and observe
Switching on the fog lights / rear fog lights is possible if the following conditions apply.
 The light switch is in the position  or  » fig. 45.
› Toswitch onthefog lights,turn the light switch to position 1 ; the warning
light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
2 , the indicator
light will light up in the instrument cluster.
If the vehicle is not fitted withfog lights,therear fog lightis switched on by
pulling out the light switch to the only possible setting.
The fog lights/rear fog light areswitched offin the reverse order.
Notice
While driving with an accessory connected to the trailer socket (e.g. trailer,
bike carrier) only the equipment is illuminated by the fog light. The towing device must be installed at the factory or from the ŠKODA original accessories.
1)
on page 60 first.
The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illuminated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
on page 60 first.
› Toturn on therear fog light, pull the light switch to position
Read and observe
The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illuminated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit.
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light
switch is in the position .
Both functions can be can be activated / deactivated via the MAXI DOT display
in the menu items Coming Home or Leaving Home » page 45, Menu item settings.
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a motor mounted below the windscreen in
the holder of the interior mirror sensor. Do not cover the sensor - the system
can be affected.
■ If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.
■
If the two switch-on variants are conflicting (e.g. if the front wheels are turned to the left and the right
turn signal light is switched on), the turn signal light has the higher priority.
Lights and visibility
63
Hazard warning light system
Fig. 46
Button for hazard warning light
system
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the audible warning is turned off.
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
parking lights will not switch on automatically!
■
■
Driving abroad

Read and observe
on page 60 first.
› Toswitch on/off, press thebutton» fig. 46.
When first switched on, the turn signal lights and the warning lightbuttons
all flash at the same time as the warning lights in the instrument cluster.
The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.
When the hazard warning system is on and the indicator light is switched on
(e.g. when turning), the hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and
only the turn signal flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle.
Parking lights

Read and observe
on page 60 first.
The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
The parking light is illuminated on the relevant side of the vehicle.
Switching on the side light on both sides 
› Switch on the ignition and turn the light switch into position » page 61, the
parking lights are turned on.
› Switch off the ignition and lock the vehicle.
Using the system
Read and observe
on page 60 first.
When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the
left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, it is necessary to have the headlights adapted by a specialist garage.
You can adjust the settings of the Xenon headlights yourself in the menu of
the MAXI DOT display under the menu itemTravel mode » page 45, Menu item
settings. In this mode, no automatic beam adjustment is made ahead of the vehicle. When switching on the ignition the warning light  flashes for 10 seconds.
Interior lighting

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Switching on the side light  on one side
› Switch off the ignition.
› Press the control lever all the way into position or until it stops» fig. 43
on page 62.
64

Front interior lights
Interior lighting, rear
65
65
The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
switched off, the lights will automatically switch off after approximately after
10 minutes.
Front interior lights
Interior lighting, rear
Fig. 48
Interior lights at the rear
Fig. 47 Front interior light: Variant 1 / Variant 2
Positions of the rocker switch A » fig. 47
 Switching on
 Automatic operation (centre position)
 Switching off
There is no icon available for the centre position (automatic operation) in Version 2.
Switch on / off (by pressing the relevant switch B ) » fig. 47
 Reading lamp left
 Reading lamp right
Automatic operation - position 
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
▶ The vehicle is unlocked.
▶ One of the doors or the luggage compartment lid is being opened.
▶ The ignition key is removed.
Operation (by moving the lens A ) » fig. 48
 Switching on
 Automatic operation (centre position) 1)
Switching off

Visibility

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
66
66
Windscreen and rear window heating
Front sun visors
WARNING
No objects should be attached to the sun visor that could restrict the view
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or in a collision.
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
▶ The vehicle is locked.
▶ The ignition is switched on.
▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
1)
In this position,the same conditions apply for the rear interior light as for the front interior light
» page 65, Front interior lights.
Lights and visibility
65
Windscreen and rear window heating
Front sun visors
Fig. 49 Buttons for the rear and front window heating system: manual air
conditioning / Climatronic

Read and observe
on page 65 first.
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the front and rear window.
The steering assist only operates when the engine is running.
Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » fig. 49
 Switching the rear window heater on/off
 Switching the windscreen heater on/off
When the heater is switched on, a lamp illuminates inside the button.
Fig. 50 Fold down the cover / fold up cover / fold down secondary visor /
make-up mirror and tape
The heating automatically switches off after 10 minutes.

Notice
If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
» page 149, Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge
protection.
■ If the light is flashing inside the button, the heater will not function due to
low battery.
■ The installation location of the button can be different depending on equipment fitted.
Operation and description of the sun visor » fig. 50
1 Swivel cover towards the windscreen
2 Swivel bracket for door
3 Swivel assist cover towards the windscreen
A Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of the
arrow)
B Tape for storage of small light objects
■
66
Using the system
Read and observe
on page 65 first.
Windscreen wipers and washers

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Front wipers and washers
Rear windscreen wipers and washers
Headlight cleaning system
Notice
Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the
windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers.
■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the engine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C.
■
67
68
68
Front wipers and washers
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is
switched on and the bonnet and boot are closed1).
Fig. 51
Operating the front windscreen
wipers and washer system
WARNING
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the forward view.
CAUTION
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them
off the windscreen » page 168.
■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor!
■ Carefully separate frozen windscreen wiper blades from the windscreen and
free from snow and ice.
■ Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is a risk of damage to the
windscreen by the windscreen wiper arms.
■ Do not switch on the ignition when the wiper arm is raised from the windscreen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet by the wiper arms.
■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wipers will try to push away
the obstacle five times. The wipers then stop to prevent themselves from being damaged. Only switch the wipers on again after the obstacle has been removed.
■
1)

Read and observe
and
on page 67 first.
The lever can be moved to the following positions » fig. 51
 High-speed wiping
 Slow-speed wiping
 Depending on equipment fitted:
▶ Intermittent wiping
▶ Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain
 Wipers and washers off
 Single wipe of the windscreen (sprung position)
A Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position - by setting the
switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more
often
 Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position)
Spraying and wiping the window 
After releasing the operating lever, the wipers will make from 3 to 4 wiper
strokes.

On vehicles which do not have a contact switch for the bonnet, the windshield wiper and wash system
operates also when the bonnet is opened.
Lights and visibility
67
At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
WARNING
Automatic wiping in rain has only a supporting purpose. The driver is not
exempt from the responsibility of setting the function of the windscreen
wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions.
Notice
If the wiping is carried out without interruption, the wiping speed varies depending on the vehicle speed.
Rear windscreen wipers and washers
Fig. 52
Operation of the rear wiper and
washer system
Notice
The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
Headlight cleaning system

Read and observe
and
on page 67 first.
The headlights are cleaned with every first and after every tenth spraying of
the windscreen under the following conditions.
 The ignition is switched on.
 The low beam is switched on.
 The outside temperature is about -12° C to +39° C.
To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to
be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray).
Rear view mirror

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Interior mirror dimming
Mirrors

Read and observe
and
on page 67 first.
The lever can be moved to the following positions » fig. 52
 Spraying and wiping the disc (spring-loaded position) - after releasing the
operating lever the wipers continue for another 2 to 3 strokes.
 Rear screen wiping
 Wipers and washers off
Automatic rear wiper
If the windscreen wiping is performed without interruption, then the automatic regular intermittent wiping of the rear window takes place.
This mode can be enabled or disabled via the MAXI DOT display in the rear wiper» page 45, Menu item settings menu item.
68
Using the system
WARNING
Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, they make objects appear smaller and further away. Therefore, use the interior mirror whenever
possible for assessing the distances to the vehicles following behind.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may
leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respiratory system.
■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes with a lot of water. Seek
medical assistance if required.
■
69
69
Interior mirror dimming
Mirrors
Fig. 54
Exterior mirror operation
Fig. 53 Rear-view mirror: manual dimming / auto-darkening / light sensor

Read and observe
on page 68 first.
Mirrors with manual dimming » fig. 53 - 
1 Basic mirror position (not dimmed)
2 Mirror blackout
Mirror with automatic dimming
Mirror dimming» fig. 53 - is automatically controlled after the engine start.
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
WARNING
Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the
mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external device can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - There is a risk of an
accident.
■ Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the light striking the
sensors is not affected by other objects. The sensors are located on the
front and back of the mirror.
■

Read and observe
on page 68 first.
The exterior mirrors can (depending on vehicle equipment) have a manual or
electric fold-in function, automatic dimming and memory function.
The rotary button can be moved into the following positions (depending on
vehicle equipment fitted)

Adjusting the left-hand exterior mirror

Switch off mirror control
 Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror
 Exterior mirror heater (only operates when the engine is running)
 Folding in the mirrors electrically (to fold back, move the rotary knob to another position) »
Setting the mirror area
› Move the rotary knob in the direction of arrows » fig. 54.
If the mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted manually by
pressing on the edge of the mirror area.
Setting the mirror surfaces synchronously
This function allows the simultaneous adjustment of the two mirror areas. This
mode can be enabled or disabled via the Maxi DOT display in the Mirror adjust.» page 45, Menu item settings menu item.
› Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror adjustment.
› Adjust the mirror areas to the desired position.

Lights and visibility
69
Manual folding mirrors
The mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window. To put it back
to its original position, it should be folded back from the side window until it
audibly clicks into place.
Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key
› Close all windows and hold  the remote control button.
The exterior mirror is folded back into the driving position when the ignition is
switched on.
Mirror with automatic dimming
The exterior mirror dimming is controlled together with auto rear-view mirror
dimming » page 69.
Memory function for mirror (vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's
seat)
It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirror when saving the
driver's seat position with » page 72, Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seator » page 72, Memory function of the remote control key.
Tilting the mirror area of the front passenger mirror (vehicles with
electrically adjustable driver's seat)
The front passenger mirror area can be tilted to the stored position to improve
the view to the curb when reversing.
Operating conditions.
 The function is activated via the MAXI DOT display in the menu item Mirror
down » page 45, Menu item settings.
 The setting of the mirror area has been previously stored» page 72,
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat or. » page 72, Memory function of the remote control key.
 The reverse gear is engaged.
 The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.
The mirror area returns to its initial position after the rotary knob is set to another position or if the speed is greater than 15 km/h.
WARNING
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning.
70
Using the system
CAUTION
Never manually fold in/out the electrically folding exterior mirrors - there is a
risk of damage to the mirror!
■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during manoeuvring, for example), then first fold in the mirror by turning the knob and
wait for a loud folding noise.
■
C
Seats and head restraints
D
Front seats

Adjust the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjusting)
Setting the extent of the curvature of the lumbar support
Notice
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Manual adjustment
Electrical adjustment
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat
Memory function of the remote control key
Folding front passenger seat
Armrest setting
71
71
72
72
73
73
WARNING
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – otherwise
there is a risk of an accident!
■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
Electrical adjustment
■

Manual adjustment
Fig. 55
Control elements on the seat

Read and observe
Fig. 56 Control elements on the seat
on page 71 first.
The seats can be adjusted by the respective operating element being pulled,
pressed or turned in the direction of the arrows » fig. 55.
A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing, the control
lever must lock audibly)
B Adjusting height of seat
Read and observe
on page 71 first.
The seats can be adjusted by the respective operating unit being pressed in
the direction of area of the arrow» fig. 56.
A seat adjustment
▶ 1 - Move in the longitudinal direction
▶ 2 - Change inclination
▶ 3 - Change height
B Adjusting the seat backrest
▶ 4 - Change inclination
C Adjusting lumbar support
▶ 5 - Change curvature
▶ 6 - Change the degree of curvature
WARNING
The electric adjustment for the front seat is functional even with the ignition off. Therefore, when leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are
not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle there is a risk of injury!
Seats and head restraints

71
Notice
If the inclination angle of the seat backrest relative to the seat surface is
greater than 102 °, then it is not possible for safety reasons to save this setting
in the memory of the electrically adjustable seats or the remote control key.
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat
Fig. 57
SET button and memory buttons
Retrieving the saved setting
The retrieval is possible when turned the ignition is switched on and the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h or when the ignition key is inserted in the ignition lock.
› Hold the desired memory button
B » fig. 57 .
Stopping the current setting
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the  button on the remote control
key.
Notice
Every time you save new seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forwards,
you must also save the front passenger mirror setting for reversing again.
Memory function of the remote control key


Read and observe
on page 71 first.
Among the memory buttons B on the driver's seat, a setting for the driver´s
seat and exterior mirror position can be saved » fig. 57.
Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forwards
› Switch on the ignition, adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors.
› Hold down the A » fig. 57button and within 10 seconds press the desired
memory button B at the same time. Storing is confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Saving front passenger mirror settings for reversing
Above the MAXI DOT display in the Mirror down menu item, the lowering function for the mirror on the passenger side must be enabled for reversing
» page 45, Menu item settings.
› Turn on the ignition and press the desired memory button B » fig. 57.
› Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passenger side mirror adjustment » page 69.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position.
› Disengage reverse gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
Read and observe
on page 71 first.
Every time the vehicle is locked, the driver´s seat and exterior mirror settings
are saved and assigned to the key with which the vehicle was locked.
After the following unlocking of the vehicle with the same key, the driver´s
seat and exterior mirrors that are saved to this key will be adopted.
Activating the function
› Unlock the vehicle with the respective remote control key and open the driver door.
› Press and hold any memory button B » fig. 57 on page 72.
› After the seat has assumed the position stored under this button, at the
same time press the button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
Activation is confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Saving front passenger mirror settings for reversing
Above the MAXI DOT display in the Mirror down menu item, the lowering function for the mirror on the passenger side must be enabled for reversing
» page 45, Menu item settings.
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key and switch on the ignition.
› Turn the knob for the external mirror control to the position for the passenger side mirror adjustment » page 69.
› Engage reverse gear.
› Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position.
› Disengage reverse gear. The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored
in the remote control key memory.
72
Using the system

Deactivating the function
› Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key.
› Press and hold down the A button » fig. 57 on page 72. At the same time,
press the button on the remote control key within 10 seconds. Deactivation
is confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Stopping the current setting
› Press any button on the driver's seat or the  button on the remote control
key.
Folding front passenger seat
Fig. 58
Folding the front passenger seat
forward
WARNING (Continued)
Do not adjust the seat back while driving - There is a risk of injury and an
accident!
■ When moving the seat backrest, keep limbs away from between the seat
cushion and seat backrest – risk of injury!
■ Never transport the following items on the seat backrest when folded
forwards.
■ Objects that could restrict the driver's view.
■ Objects which make it impossible for the driver to control the vehicle
(e.g. if they roll under the pedals, or protrude into the driver's area).
■ Objects which could lead to injury to passengers (e.g. if accelerating
sharply, braking or changing direction).
■
Armrest setting
Fig. 59
Adjust armrest

Read and observe
on page 71 first.
The front passenger seat can, depending on specification, be folded forward
into a horizontal position.
› To fold the seat down, pull the lever in the direction of arrow
1 and fold
down the seat back in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 58. The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place.
› To fold back, pull the lever in the direction of arrow 1 pull and fold back the
seat back in the direction of arrow 2 . The locking mechanism must audibly
snap into place.
› Check this by pulling on the seat backrest.
WARNING
If the seat backrest is folded down, only the seat behind the driver´s seat
can be used to transport passengers.
■ The front passenger airbag should be switched off when transporting objects on the seat which was folded forwards » page 21, Deactivating the
front passenger airbag.
■

Read and observe
on page 71 first.
› To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow
A into one
of the six locking positions » fig. 59.
› To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A until the stop and then
fold down against the direction of the arrow.
› To Set the armrest lengthways in the direction of arrow B Move to the desired position.
Rear seats

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Adjusting seats in forward/back direction
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
74
74 
Seats and head restraints
73
Folding the seat backrest forwards and folding the seat fully forwards
Unlocking and removing seats
Adjusting seats in crosswise direction
Folding the seats back into position
74
75
75
75
Folding the seat backrest forwards and folding the seat fully
forwards
Adjusting seats in forward/back direction
Fig. 60
Adjusting seats in forward/back
direction
Fig. 62 Safety position of seat belt / folding the seat completely forward
Fig. 63
Lock forward folded seats
› Pull the lever
A in the direction of arrow 1 and move the seat to the desired
position in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 60.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Folding the seat backrest forwards
A of the seat belt into the opening in the side panel» fig. 62.
› Remove the head restraint from the rear middle seat.
› Push the outer rear seats towards the rear as far as they will go » fig. 60 on
page 74.
› Fold the outer seat backrest and then the centre seat backrest to the stop
on the seat surface » fig. 61 on page 74.
› Then pull the lever again A » fig. 61 on page 74 and push the seat back
down until it clicks into place in a lower position.
› Insert the belt buckle
Fig. 61 Adjusting the seat backrest
› Pull lever
A lever on the bottom in the direction of the arrow 1 pull and set
the desired tilt of the seat back in the arrow direction 2 » fig. 61.
› Check for yourself that the seat backrest is engaged by pulling on it.
Folding seats fully forwards and locking them
› If the outer rear seat is fully folded forward, push it towards the rear as far as
it can go.
› Pull the lever
B » fig. 62 in the direction of the arrow 1 and push the seat
completely forward in the direction of arrow 2 .
74
Using the system

› Secure the folded forward seat with the aid of the fixing belt to a guide rod
of the head restraint in the front seat » fig. 63.
WARNING
The seat backs in occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been enlarged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
transported on the other rear seats.
■ The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no objects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compartment under sudden braking – There is risk of injury.
■
■
Notice
The outer seats are not mutually interchangeable. In the rear area the left seat
is marked with the letter L and the right seat with the letter R.
Adjusting seats in crosswise direction
Fig. 65
Locking seats
CAUTION
When moving the seat backrest the seat belts should not be trapped - there is
a risk of damage to the seat belts.
CAUTION
Before folding the rear middle seat forward, make sure that the storage compartment, the ashtray and the cup holder in the rear part of the centre console
are closed - risk of damage.
■ Only keep the seats in the folded forward position for as long as necessary to
transport cargo - there is a risk of damaging the front seat backrests. The
seats must be folded back once the cargo has been transported.
■ If the outer seat is not in the rear end position when folding forward, damage
can occur to the locking bolts when unlocking the seat.
■
Unlocking and removing seats
Fig. 64
Unlocking the folded forward
seat and carrying handles on the
seat surface
› Remove the middle seat» fig. 64 on page 75.
› Fold the outer seat forwards and unlock » fig. 64 on page 75.
› Move the outer seat on the guide towards the middle of the vehicle up to the
stop.
› Lock the folded forward seat by pressing the seat locks
A in the direction of
arrow » fig. 65.
Folding back into the starting position is accomplished in the reverse order.
Folding the seats back into position
Fig. 66
Folding the seat backrest back
into position
› If the seat has been removed, first position it on the guide and lock it in place
› Unlock the folded seat by pressing seat locks» fig. 62 on page 74
direction of arrow » fig. 64.
› Remove the seat on the carrying handle B or C .
A in the
using seat locking A » fig. 65 on page 75. Pull the seat upwards to ensure
that the seat is locked correctly.
› Fold the seat in the horizontal position until it can be heard clicking. Check
for yourself that the seat can no longer be lifted by pulling it up.
Seats and head restraints

75
› Press the lever in direction of arrow
1 » fig. 66 and fold back the seat backrest to its original position in the direction of arrow 2. Check this by pulling
on the seat backrest.
Removing/fitting
Headrests

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Setting the height
Removing/fitting
76
76
Notice
The middle rear head restraint is only adjustable in two positions.
Setting the height
Fig. 68 Removing/installing the headrest
› To remove the headrest, pull it out of the seat backrest up to the stop.
› Press locking button A in the direction of arrow 1, and pull out the head restraint in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 68.
› To insert the headrest, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow 3 until the locking button clicks into place.
Front seat heating
Fig. 69
Buttons for heating the front
seats
Fig. 67 Setting the height of the headrest
› Grasp the restraint and move upwards in the direction of 1 » fig. 67.
› To move the headrest down, press the securing button A in the direction of
arrow 2 and hold it down while pressing the headrest in the direction of arrow 3 .
The seat backrests and seats can be heated electrically.
Buttons for the seat heating » fig. 69
 Left seat heating
 Right seat heating
› To turn on the heating to max, press the key or button.
By repeatedly pressing the button, the heat is turned down until it is completely switched off. The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number
of illuminated warning lights in the switch.
76
Using the system

The seat heating only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
If you are sensitive to pain and/or temperature, e.g. through medication,
paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to
use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to take
regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the
body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your
doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed to avoid damaging the seats.
■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
■ Do not switch on the heating for unoccupied seats.
■ Do not switch on the heating for seats which have objects on them (e.g. a
child seat, bag or similar).
■ Do not switch on the heating for seats which have seat covers or protective
covers on them.
Notice
If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automatically
» page 149, Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge
protection.
Useful features
Interior fittings

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
78
78
79
79
79
80
80
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
84
85
85
85
86
86
86
87
Ticket holder
Storage compartment on the dash panel
Storage compartments in doors
Storage compartment in the front middle console
USB and AUX input
Cup holders
Cigarette lighter
Ashtray
12 volt power outlet
Waste container
Multimedia holder
Storage compartment below the front armrest
Storage net in the front centre console
Glasses storage box
Storage compartment on the passenger side
Storage compartment for umbrella
Clothes hook
Storage pockets on the rear sides of the front seats
Storage compartment in rear centre console
Folding table on the front seat backrest
Folding table on the rear middle seat backrest
Removable through-loading bag
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic –
There is a risk of an accident!
■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell There is a risk of an accident!
■
Useful features
77

WARNING (Continued)
Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects
(e.g. child safety seat) provided for this purpose – risk of accident!
■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.
■ For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments should be closed
while driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened lid or through the
loose objects in the compartment.
■ Make sure no objects protrude from the storage compartments - There is
a risk of injury!
■ Do not exceed the permissible loads for the storage compartments, pockets and nets - There is risk of injury and risk of damage to the compartments, pockets and nets!
■ Ash, cigarettes, cigars etc. should only be stored in the ashtray - There is
a risk of fire/burns!
■ The storage compartments, multimedia holder and waste container are
not a substitute for the ashtray and must not be used for such purposes –
There is risk of fire!
Storage compartment on the dash panel
■
CAUTION
No not place large or sharp objects in the storage compartments, pockets and
nets - there is a risk of damage to the compartments, pockets and nets.
Ticket holder
Fig. 70
Ticket holder

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The ticket holder» fig. 70 is provided for the holding and displaying e.g. car
park tickets.
78
Using the system
Fig. 71
Opening the storage compartment

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
› ToOpen press the button» fig. 71, the cover opens in the direction of the arrow.
› To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
Certain models do not have a storage compartment lid.
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the storage compartment - there is
risk of damage at high temperatures.
Storage compartments in doors
USB and AUX input
Fig. 72 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door

Read and observe
and
Fig. 74 AUX input: underneath the armrest / above the storage compartment
on page 77 first.
Fig. 75
USB input
Storage compartments » fig. 72
A Storage compartment
B Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1 l
C Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l
WARNING
The storage compartment A » fig. 72is to be used exclusively for storing
objects which do not stick out - There is a risk of restricting the effectiveness of the side airbags.

Storage compartment in the front middle console
Fig. 73
Non-lockable compartment
Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
Depending on equipment fitted, the AUX input is below the front armrest
» fig. 74 -  or above the storage compartment » fig. 74 - .
The USB input (marked with and ) is located above the storage compartment » fig. 75.
Information for use » Infotainment Owner's Manual or » The Radio Owner's
Manual.

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The storage compartment is in the front of the centre console » fig. 73.
Useful features
79
WARNING
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – There is a risk of scalding!
Cup holders
■
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
■ Before folding the rear centre seat, cup holder D » fig. 77 must be closed there is risk of damage.
■
Fig. 76 Cup holder: in the centre console, front / on the folding table in
the centre backrest
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 78
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 77 Cup holders in the rear centre console: Open / Resize

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
In the cup holders A and B two drinks containers can be placed in
each» fig. 76.
Cup holder D in rear centre console
› To Open press the holder in area C » fig. 77. The holder slides out.
› Pull The holder up to the stop in the direction of arrow 1 and adjust the size
by moving the plate e in direction of arrow 2 .
› To close, push in the compartment away from the direction of arrow 1 .
A 1.5 litre bottle (max. capacity) can be stored in the holder D .

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
› To use the lighter, push it in as far as the stop and wait until the glowing
lighter clicks out again » fig. 78.
› Take out the glowing lighter instantly, use it and insert it back into the socket.
WARNING
The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burns, fire or
damage to the vehicle interior.
■ Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - There is a risk of burns.
■
Notice
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket.
80
Using the system
Rear ashtray - low centre console
Ashtray
› To open, grasp the lid on the edge C
and fold in the direction of arrow 1
until the stop » fig. 79.
› To remove, grasp the ashtray at the handle D and remove in direction of arrow 2 .
› To useinsert ashtray in the console away from the direct of arrow 2 and
push in.
Fig. 79 Removing front ashtray and opening / Low centre console: Opening rear ashtray / Removing rear ashtray
Rear ashtray - high centre console
› To open, press on the lid of the glasses compartment in area E . The ashtray
opens out in the direction of the arrow 1 » fig. 80.
› To Remove the ashtray insert carefully press the lid in the direction of arrow
1 up to the stop.
› Grasp the ashtray insert in the area of arrow and remove it in the direction of
arrow 2 .
› To Insert the ashtray insert insert in the slot away from arrow 2 and push
in.
WARNING
Never place flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
CAUTION
The ashtray in the rear central console must be closed before folding forward
the rear middle seat - There is a risk of damage.
Fig. 80 High centre console: Open rear ashtray / Removing rear ashtray
insert

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The ashtray can be used for ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like.
Removable front ashtray
› Remove the ashtray in the direction of the arrow A » fig. 79.
Usetakes place in reverse order.
› To the Openturn the ashtray cover in the direction of arrow
B.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Useful features
81
CAUTION
The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical accessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts - otherwise there
is a risk of damage to the electrical system of the vehicle.
■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
■ Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch
off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage
to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations.
12 volt power outlet
■
Waste container
Fig. 81 Cover of the 12-volt power socket: in the front centre console/ in
the luggage compartment

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
› Touse, remove the cover of the socket» fig. 81 - or open the cover of the
socket» fig. 81 - .
› Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic –
There is a risk of an accident!
■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell There is a risk of an accident!
■ Stow all devices safely during the journey to prevent them from being
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident – There is a risk to life!
■ The devices may warm up during operation – There is a risk of injury or
fire!
■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
■ The socket also works if the ignition is switched off. When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such as
children, unattended in the vehicle.
■
Fig. 82 Waste container: inserting and moving / opening
Fig. 83 Replace bags

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The waste container can be inserted into the slot in the door.
82
Using the system

Insert waste container
› Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
› Push in the rear waste container in the direction of the arrow A » fig. 82.
› Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow B .
Remove the waste container
› Remove the waste container away from the arrow
A » fig. 82.
Open/close waste container
› Lift the lid in the direction of arrow C » fig. 82.

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
Multimedia holder » fig. 84
A Storage compartment for storing two coins
B Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
C Storage compartment for storing a mobile phone
Storage compartment below the front armrest
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
› Remove the waste container from the slot.
› Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 83.
› Pull the bag downwards together with the frame in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the bag from the frame.
› Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction
of arrow 3 .
› Place the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow 4 into the container
body, so that the two lugs audibly engage on the frame.
Notice
We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags.
Multimedia holder
Fig. 84
Multimedia holder
Fig. 85 Open storage compartment / open air supply

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
Storage compartment
› To open, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A » fig. 85.
› To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A until the stop and then
fold down against the direction of the arrow A .
Air supply
› To open, pull the handle in the direction of arrow B » fig. 85.
› To close, turn the lid against the direction of arrow B until it stops.
When the air inlet is opened, the air flows into the storage compartment with
a temperature corresponding to the control dial settings on the A/C unit, depending on the outer climate conditions.
The air inlet in the storage compartment is connected to position  through
adjustment of the control dial for air distribution. This setting causes the maximum amount of air to flow into the storage compartment (depending on the
rotary regulator position for the fan).
Useful features
83
Storage net in the front centre console
Storage compartment on the passenger side
Fig. 86
Storage net

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The storage net » fig. 86 is intended to store maps, magazines, etc.
The maximum permissible load of the net is 0.5 kg.
Glasses storage box
Fig. 87
Opening the glasses storage box
Fig. 88 Open storage compartment / open air supply

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
Storage compartment
› To open, press the A button. The cover folds in the direction of arrow
» fig. 88.
› To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
Air supply
› To Open pull the lever B in the direction of the arrow to the stop » fig. 88.
› To close, turn the dial against the direction of arrow until it stops.
The temperature of the storage compartment supplied with air is dependent
on the setting in the air conditioning.

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
› To open, press the -- button. The compartment folds in the direction of the
arrow » fig. 87.
› To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it
audibly clicks into place.
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - there is
risk of damage at high temperatures.
■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – There is a
risk of impairment to the function of the anti-theft alarm system.
■
84
Using the system
Notice
A pen holder is provided in the stowage compartment.

Storage compartment for umbrella
Fig. 89
Opening the storage compartment
Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » fig. 90.
The maximum permissible load for each hook is 2 kg.
WARNING
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
of clothing that has been hung up - There is a risk of injury.
■ Do not use hangers to hang up the clothes - there is a risk of restricting
the effectiveness of head airbags and a risk of injury from the hanger.
■ Make sure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impede your
vision.
■

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The storage compartment under the passenger seat is used for storing an umbrella.
› To open, pull the handle in direction of arrow
Storage pockets on the rear sides of the front seats
1 pull and open the compart-
Fig. 91
Map pockets
ment in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 89.
› To close, screw in the lid in the opposite direction of arrow
2 until it audibly
clicks into place.
CAUTION
Never store a wet umbrella in the storage compartment - there is a risk of
damage to the umbrella.
Notice
We recommend that you use the umbrella from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The storage pockets » fig. 91 are intended for storage of maps, magazines or
similar.
Clothes hook
Fig. 90
Clothes hooks
Useful features
85
Storage compartment in rear centre console
WARNING
The folding table must not be in the horizontal position while driving risk of injury.
■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
■ Never put hot beverage containers in the table. If the vehicle moves, they
may spill – There is a risk of scalding!
■
Fig. 92
Opening the storage compartment
Folding table on the rear middle seat backrest

Read and observe
and
Fig. 94
Middle seat backrest already folded forward
on page 77 first.
› ToopenPull the top edge and open the compartment in the direction of the
arrow » fig. 92.
› To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION
Before folding forward the rear centre seat, the storage compartment must be
closed - there is a risk of damage to the storage compartment.
Folding table on the front seat backrest
Fig. 93
Fold down the folding table

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
› To Unfold Raise the table in the direction of the arrow in the horizontal position » fig. 93.
› Foldthe table back into the horizontal position by pushing it away from the
arrow.
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 10 kg.
86
Using the system

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The middle seat backrest can be used as an armrest or table with cup holders
» fig. 94 by folding it forwards.
CAUTION
If the middle rear seat backrest should be folded forward for lengthy periods,
then make sure that the belt locks are not located below it - this can warp the
upholstery or fabric.
Removable through-loading bag
Tablet holder
Fig. 95
Securing the removable throughloading bag

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
87
88
Attaching the rear headrests
Handle holder
In the holders, external devices (eg. B. Tablet, Smartphone u. Ä.) with a min
size of 122 mm and a max size of 195 mm may be attached.
The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.

Read and observe
and
on page 77 first.
The removable through-loading bag (hereafter referred to as through-loading
bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis (max. 2 pairs).
Insert through-loading bag and skis
› Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards until it rests on the seat
» page 74.
› Place the empty through-loading bag in the opening in such a way that the
end of the bag with the zip is in the boot.
› Push the skis and poles with the tips backwards into the through-loading
bag and seal it.
Secure through-loading bag and skis
› Pull the securing belt with both lock tongues out of the pocket of the
through-loading bag.
› Insert the lock tongues A » fig. 95 in the belt locks of the rear middle seat
belt C , first of all on the one side and then on the other side.
› Place the securing belt in the middle of the skis between the heel and the tip
of the bindings and pull the securing belt tight at the free end of the belt B .
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of
damage or functional impairment.
Attaching the rear headrests
Fig. 96 Inserting: adapter / holder

WARNING
The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 10 kg.
Always stow and secure the skis and the bag securely - otherwise there is
a risk of injury or accident!
■
■
CAUTION
Never fold and stow the through-loading bag when it is wet - There is a risk of
damaging the through-loading bag.
Useful features
87
Fig. 99
Adjust holder size
Fig. 97 Removing: Holder / adapter

Read and observe
on page 87 first.
› Toinsert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest
and clip in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 96 » .
› Clip in the holder in the direction of arrow 2 into the adapter.
› To remove, pull on the securing tab A in direction of arrow 3 and take the
holder in direction of arrow 4 out of the adapter » fig. 97.
› Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow 5 from the guide
rods of the headrest.
WARNING
Carefully clip in the adapter - risk of finger injury.
Handle holder
Fig. 98 Tilt and rotate holder
88
Using the system

Read and observe
on page 87 first.
The holder may be by 30° in the direction of the arrow 1 tipped and by 360°
in the direction of arrow 2 turned » fig. 98.
› To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A in the direction of arrow 3 and push the part B in the direction of arrow 4 to the desired position » fig. 99.
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
■ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of
the vehicle – There is a risk of an accident!
■ An unsecured dirt or improperly attached load could slip during a sudden
manoeuvre or in an accident in the vehicle - There is a risk of injury!
■ Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of
death!
■ When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats .
Transport of cargo
■
Luggage compartment and Transport

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fastening elements
Securing nets
Multifunction pocket
Fastening bar with sliding hook
Flexible storage compartment
Floor covering on both sides
Luggage compartment cover
Net partition
Storage compartments
Removable storage box
Removable light
Class N1 vehicles
89
90
90
90
91
91
91
92
93
93
93
94
When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to the
shift in the centre of gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted
accordingly.
When transporting cargo, the following the instructions must be followed
the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with
suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or fixing nets so that they cannot
slip.
▶ Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
▶ The tyre pressure must be adapted to the load.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks, etc. as these could be damaged.
■ Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of abrasive objects.
■ Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the luggage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the compartments.
■ Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these
punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments.
■
Fastening elements
▶ Distribute
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Fig. 100 Fasteners: variant 1/ variant 2

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment.
Transport of cargo

89
Overview of the fasteners » fig. 100
A Lashing rings for fastening items of luggage, securing nets and multifunction pockets
B Fastening strip with integrated hook for attaching securing nets and multifunction pockets
C Lashing eyes only for fastening fixing nets
Multifunction pocket
Fig. 102
Fasten multifunction pocket
The maximum static load of the individual lashing eyes A is 350 kg C is 150
kg.
Securing nets

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The pocket » fig. 102can be secured to the fastening elements A and B
» fig. 100 on page 89.
The maximum permissible load of the attached to the fastener bag is 3 kg.
CAUTION
In vehicles with a variable loading floor, it is not possible to attach the pocket
to the fastening elements.
Fig. 101 Fastening examples for nets

Read and observe
and
Fastening bar with sliding hook
on page 89 first.
Fastening examples for nets » fig. 101
A Horizontal pocket
B Floor net
C Vertical pocket
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.
Fig. 103 Moving hook onto the mounting bar / removing hook

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
A fastening bar is located on both sides of the luggage compartment with two
moveable hooks each, in order to attach small items of luggage, such as bags,
etc.
90
Using the system

The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 7.5 kg.
Moving the hook
› Fold up the hook in direction of arrow 1 » fig. 103 until an angle of approx.
45° is reached.
› Move the hook in direction of arrow 2 into the desired position and fold
down the hook as far as the stop in direction of arrow 3 .
Removing hooks
The hook can be removed only in the rear region of the attachment bar.
› Fold the hook upwards in the direction of the arrow
4 » fig. 103 until it
slackens and remove in the direction of arrow 5 .
Inserting hook
› Position the hook on the fastening strip in the vertical position in direction of
arrow 5 » fig. 103 and lightly press it on.
› Fold up the hook to the away from the arrow 4 until it locks.
CAUTION
The flexible storage compartment cannot be installed in vehicles with the variable loading floor.
Floor covering on both sides

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
You can fit a double-sided floor covering in the luggage compartment. One
side is made of fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet
or dirty items ).
Luggage compartment cover
Flexible storage compartment
Fig. 104
Flexible storage compartment
Fig. 105 Remove the luggage compartment cover


Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The flexible storage compartment can be installed on the right-hand side of
the boot » fig. 104.
The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects with a maximum total weight of 8 kg.
› To use,insert the two ends of the storage compartment into the openings in
the side trim of the luggage compartment and push the shelf down to lock.
› To removegrasp the storage compartment on the top edges, press the upper
corners inwards and release the storage compartment by pulling upwards.
› Remove the storage compartment by pulling towards you.
Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
If the support straps A » fig. 105 are attached to the luggage compartment lid,
then opening the lid will raise the luggage compartment lid cover (hereafter
referred to as cover).
Removing
› Fold the rear seat backrests partially forward » page 74, Adjusting the angle
of the seat backrest.
› On both sides of the luggage compartment lid, unhook the straps A in the
direction of arrow 1 » fig. 105.
› Place the cover in the horizontal position.
› Press on the two sides on the underside of the cover in the region of the
studs C in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Fold the slackened front part of the luggage compartment cover over the
head restraints of the rear seats.
Transport of cargo
91

› Slightly tilt the cover and remove.
Installing
› Place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel.
› Position the mounts on the cover B onto the side trim panel via pins C
» fig. 105.
› Press on the two sides on the upper side of the cover in the area of the
brackets C .
The fixture B must lock into place of the recess C on both sides of the luggage compartment.
› On both sides of the luggage compartment lid unhook the straps
A.
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - There is a risk of injury if you brake or have a collision!
› Remove the net partition from the bag.
› Unfold both parts of the cross rod until they are heard to engage.
› First of all insert the cross rod into the mount B » fig. 106 on one side and
push it forward. In the same way, insert the cross rod into the mount B on
the other side of the vehicle.
› Hang the spring hooks C at the ends of the belt into the lashing eyelets behind the rear seats.
› Pull the belts through the tensioning clasp.
Removingis carried out in the reverse order.
Packing the net partition
› Press on the red button of the joint A » fig. 106. The joint dissolves.
› Put the net partition folded together in the bag and close it.
› Attach the bag with the aid of the plastic spring hooks to the eyes on the left
and right luggage compartment trim panel.
Installing and removing the net partition behind the rear seats with variable
loading floor is carried out in the same way as behind the rear seats without
the variable loading floor. Use the lower fixing eyelets on the carrier rails in order to attach the spring hooks.
Net partition
Installing and removing the net partition behind the front seats is carried out
in the same way as behind the rear seats. Use the fixing eyes behind the front
seats in order to attach the carabines. To enlarge the luggage compartment,
the rear seats can be removed » page 75.
The opening D » fig. 106 in the net partition is designed to pass through the
three-point seat belt » page 16.
Fig. 106 Net partition behind the rear seats

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The net partition can either be installed behind the rear seats or behind the
front seats.
Installing/removing behind the rear seats
› Remove the luggage compartment cover » page 91, Luggage compartment
cover.
92
Using the system
WARNING
The removable storage box must be located under the variable loading
floor for the safe use of the variable loading floor.
Storage compartments
Removable light
Fig. 109
Removable lamp
Fig. 107 Storage compartment on the left / right

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The cover for the side compartment A » fig. 107can be removed, thus enlarging the luggage compartment.
› Grasp the top part of the cover
A and carefully remove it in the direction of
the arrow.
The removable storage compartment A is suitable for stowing small objects
weighing up to 1.5 kg in total, and the compartment B for up to 0.5 kg.
Removable storage box
Fig. 108
Storage box
Fig. 110 Removable light: Removing / Inserting

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The light is located on the left side of the luggage compartment and is used to
light the luggage compartment or as a portable light.

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
The storage box » fig. 108 is placed under the floor covering and can be taken
out.
There is a storage space for the vehicle tool kit under the storage box
» page 157, Vehicle tool kit.
The lamp is fitted with magnets. As a result, this can, for example, be fitted to
the vehicle body.
Description of the light » fig. 109
A Button to turn on / off the light
B Part that lights up when the lamp is in the mount
C Part that lights up when the lamp is not in the mount
Transport of cargo

93
If the light is in the mount, this will illuminate when the boot lid is opened.
› To remove, hold the light in the area
D and swivel in the direction of arrow
1 » fig. 110.
› To switch on the removed light, press button
A » fig. 109. Pressing the light
again will switched it off.
› To insert, first of all insert the light with the rear part
E into the mount
» fig. 110 and then push the light in the direction of arrow 2 until it audibly
clicks into place.
If the light is not switched off and is correctly inserted in the mount, the LED
diodes in the front part of the light C » fig. 109 are automatically switched off.
If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, this does not light up when
the luggage compartment lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not
charged.
Lamp charges
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type NiMH AAA batteries. The batteries are charged continuously with the engine running (to fully charge the
battery takes approximately 3 hours).
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Removing/inserting variable loading floor
Secure the variable loading floor in the raised position
Removing/installing the carrier rails
Using the variable loading floor with a spare wheel
The variable loading floor makes it easier to handle bulky goods and creates an
even floor when the rear seat backrests are folded forward.
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Removing/inserting variable loading floor
Replace batteries » page 166.
CAUTION
The light is not waterproof, so it must be protected from humidity - otherwise
there is risk of damage.
Class N1 vehicles

Read and observe
and
on page 89 first.
In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
complies with the EN 12195 standard (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the
load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle operation. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.
94
Using the system
94
95
95
95
Fig. 111 Fold up / removal variable loading floor
› To remove, grasp the variable loading floor on the handle
A and fold together in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 111.
› Fold up the variable loading floor in direction of arrow 2 .
› Pull on both sides of the locking levers in direction of arrow 3 .
› Remove the variable loading floor in direction of arrow 4 .
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
Secure the variable loading floor in the raised position
Fig. 112
Secured loading floor in the
raised position
Installing
› Position the carrier rails on the sides of the luggage compartment.
› Press both check points on each carrier rail B » fig. 113 up to the stop.
› Check the attachment of the carrier rails by pulling it.
Using the variable loading floor with a spare wheel
› Fold up the hooks on the fastening strip in direction of arrow
1 » fig. 103 on
page 90.
› Fold up the variable loading floor behind the rear back backrests.
› Fold down the hooks in direction of arrow 3 » fig. 103 on page 90 as far as
the stop.
› Support the variable loading floor on the hooks folded downwards » fig. 112.
Removing/installing the carrier rails
Fig. 114 Fold up the side panels of the variable loading floor / space under
the variable loading floor
The sides of the variable loading floor can be folded in the direction of arrow
» fig. 114 - .
The room under the variable loading floor » fig. 114 -  can be used to stow
loading objects.
Transportation on the roof rack
Roof load
The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. carriers is 100 kg.
Fig. 113 Slacken check points/remove carrier rails
Removing
› Slacken the check points
B » fig. 113 on the carrier rails using the vehicle key
or a flat screwdriver.
› Hold the carrier rail A in the front area and remove by pulling in the direction
of arrow 1 .
› Hold the carrier rail A in the rear area and loosen and remove by pulling in
the direction of arrow 2 .
WARNING
The following instructions must be observed to aid road safety when transporting cargo on the roof rack.
■ Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly
with suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.
Transport of cargo
95

WARNING (Continued)
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and gross permissible
weight of the vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk
of accident!
■
CAUTION
Make sure that the sliding / tilting roof or the boot lid does not collide with
the roof load when opened.
■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported.
■
Notice
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Heating and ventilation
Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Heating and manual air conditioning
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Climatronic - automatic operation
Recirculation mode
Air discharge nozzles
97
97
98
99
99
The heater heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning system also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system works under the following conditions.
 The cooling system is switched on.
 The engine is running.
 The outside temperature is above 2 °C.
 The blower is switched on.
When the cooling system is switched on, it prevents misting of the windscreen
and windows.
It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly activating the air recirculation system» page 99.
Protecting health
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
use of the cooling system are to be observed.
▶ The difference between the outside temperature and the inside temperature
should not be greater than 5 °C.
▶ The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
▶ Once a year, the air conditioning should be disinfected by a specialist garage. 
96
Using the system
WARNING
The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.
Otherwise there is a risk of an accident.
■ Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
■
Notice
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak!
■ At high coolant temperature, the cooling system is switched off, to ensure
the engine cooling.
■
Heating and manual air conditioning
Fig. 115 Controls of the heating / air conditioning

Read and observe
on page 97 first.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
the corresponding button » fig. 115.
Setting temperature
▶  Reduce temperature /  increase temperature
B Set the blower speed (Level 0: Fan off, level 4: high-speed)
C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 99
 Switching the cooling system on/off
 Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 66
A
 Switch the aux. heating and ventilation on/off » page 101
 Switch recirculation on/off » page 99
When the function is switched on, the indicator light in the button illuminates.
Information on cooling system
After pressing the button  the indicator light on the button lights up, even if
not all the conditions for the cooling system have been met. The cooling system starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been met
» page 96.
Notice
To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air conditioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circumstances.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Fig. 116 Controls for the Climatronic

Read and observe
on page 97 first.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
the corresponding button » fig. 116.
A Adjusting the temperature for the left side (or for both sides)
▶  Reduce temperature /  increase temperature
B Interior temperature sensor
C Depending on equipment fitted:
▶  Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 66
▶  Switch auxiliary heating and ventilation on/off » page 101
D Adjust the temperature for the right side
▶  Reduce temperature /  increase temperature
Heating and ventilation
97

 Adjust the blower speed
▶  Increase speed
▶  Decrease speed
 Switching the airflow to the windscreen on and off
 Air flow to the windows
 Air flow to the upper body
 Air flow in the footwell
 Switch the automatic recirculation on/off » page 99
 Switching the rear window heater on/off » page 66
 Switching automatic mode on » page 98
 Switching Climatronic system off
 Switching the cooling system on/off
 Switch the temperature setting in Dual mode on/off
When the function is switched on, the indicator light in the button lights up.
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation function remains
active whereby the minimum temperature that can be reached is the outside
temperature.
Setting temperature
The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately or together.
The temperature for both sides, is set by turning the knob A » fig. 116 (the
warning light in the button  is not illuminated).
The temperature for the right side is adjusted by turning the knob D (the
warning light in the button  is illuminated).
The temperature for the left side is adjusted by turning the knob A (the
warning light in the button  is illuminated).
At a temperature setting below 18 ° C at the start of the numerical scale, the
symbol  will illuminate. Climatronic is using Maximum cooling performance.
At a temperature setting above 26 ° C at the end of the numerical scale, the
symbol will illuminate. Climatronic is using maximum heat output.
There is no automatic temperature control in the two end positions. In the
range between 18 °C to 26 °C, automatic temperature control takes place.
98
Using the system
Controlling blower
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with
the interior temperature. However, the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular needs.
If the blower speed is reduced to a minimum, Climatronic is switched off.
The set blower speed is displayed above the button when the respective
number of indicator lights come on.
CAUTION
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor B » fig. 116 - the function of the
Climatronic could be affected.
Notice
As soon as the windscreen mists up, press the symbol key . Press the
button  once the windscreen has demisted.
■ In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in engine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances.
■
Climatronic - automatic operation

Read and observe
on page 97 first.
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button  lights up, the Climatronic operates in “HIGH”-mode.
When pressing  the button again, the Climatronic switches to “LOW”-mode
and the indicator light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise
level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air
conditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied.
By pressing the button  again, it is changed to “HIGH”-mode.
Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air
distribution or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed. Temperature regulation is continued.
Notice
Climatronic is set to the “HIGH” setting at the factory.
Recirculation mode

Read and observe
on page 97 first.
The recirculated-air mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the
interior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior
of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
Heating and manual air conditioning system
› To switch on, press the  button.
› Toswitch off, press the button again.
If the air distribution control is set to position  when the recirculation modes
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off.
CAUTION
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air operation
is switched on. The smoke sucked from the interior is deposited on the evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the air
conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Notice
Climatronic automatic air distribution operates only if the outside temperature
is higher than approx. 2 °C.
Air discharge nozzles
By pressing the button, the air recirculation also in this position can be
switched on again.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
› To turn the recirculation mode on, press the symbol key  repeatedly until
the warning light illuminates on the left side of the button.
› To activate the automatic recirculation mode, press the Symbol key  repeatedly until the indicator light is lit on the right side of the button.
Climatronic can have a sensor that automatically turns on if there is an increased concentration of pollutants in the incoming air.
When the pollutant concentration decreases to the normal level, the recirculated air mode is automatically switched off.
If the air quality sensor does not automatically switch on the recirculated air
mode in the event of an unpleasant odour, you can switch it on yourself by
pressing the button . The warning light illuminates in the button on the left
side.
Fig. 117 Air vents at the front

To turn off the air recirculation or to deactivate the automatic air recirculation, press the  button of press the  symbol button repeatedly until the
warning lights in the button go out.
WARNING
The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time,
because no fresh air is fed through from the outside. “Stale air” may result
in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. As soon as windows mist up, turn on the recirculation system immediately - The is a risk of an accident!
Heating and ventilation
99
Notice
The air outlet vents 6 » fig. 118 are only fitted on vehicles with the higher centre console.
Aux. heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Switch on / off
System settings
Remote control
Fig. 118 Air vents at the rear

Read and observe
on page 97 first.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4 » fig. 117
and 6 » fig. 118 – the outlets can be opened and closed individually.
Setting the airflow direction of the air outlet nozzles 3 and 4 takes place by
moving of the adjusting unit A » fig. 117 in the desired direction.
Setting the airflow direction of the air outlet nozzles 6 takes place by rotating
the controller C or D » fig. 118 in the desired direction.
› To Open / Close the air outlet nozzles 3 and 4 turn the controller
B to position / 0 » fig. 117.
› To Open / Close the air outlet nozzles 6 turn the controller C between the
end positions / to the final position » fig. 118.
Depending on the setting for air distribution, the air will flow from the following air vents.
Set the direction of the air
outlet
Air vents » fig. 117 and » fig. 118




1. 2. 4
1. 2. 4. 5. 7
3. 4. 6
4. 5. 7
CAUTION
Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised.
100 Using the system
101
101
102
The Aux. heating heats the vehicle interior as well as the engine. For heating,
fuel is consumed from the fuel tank.
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior with
the engine switched off, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
The aux. heating (aux. heating and ventilation) (hereafter referred to as aux.
heating) ensures the heating / ventilation depending on the setting of the air
conditioning and the air outlet vents before switching off the ignition.
WARNING
The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garages) –There is a risk of poisoning!
■ The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk
of fire.
■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. If you want to use the auxiliary heating, do not park the vehicle
in places where the exhaust fumes can come into contact with flammable
materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. - There is
a risk of fire.
■
CAUTION
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.

Notice
The aux. heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant
temperature of approx. 50 °C.
■ In the engine compartment, water vapour may form during the operation of
the aux. heating.
■
Switch on / off
After switching off the system, the coolant pump and the auxiliary heating will
continue running a little while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in the
heating.
For vehicles with petrol engines, the automatic switching on and off of the
aux. heating can be turned off by a specialist garage.
System settings

Fig. 119 Button for direct switching the manual air conditioning / Climatronic on/ off on the operating part

Read and observe
and
on page 100 first.
Functional requirements of the aux. heating.
 The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
 The fuel supply is adequate (the warning light  is not illuminated in the
instrument cluster).
Direct switching on/off
The aux. heating can be directly switched on or off at any time using the button» fig. 119 on the operating part of the air-conditioning system, on the operating part of the Climatronic system or via the radio remote control» page 102 .
Automatic on / off
▶ Over a set and activated preset time in the MAXI DOTDisplay.
▶ According to the environmental conditions.
If the auxiliary heating has not already been switched off, it switches off automatically after the running time set in the Running time menu.
Read and observe
and
on page 100 first.
The following menu items can be selected from the Aux. heating menu item in
the MAXI DOT display (depending on the vehicle equipment).
■ Day of the wk. - set the current day of the week;
■ Running time - Set the required running time in 5 minute increments. The running time can be 10 to 60 minutes.
■ Mode - Set the desired heating/ventilation mode
■ Starting time 1, Starting time 2, Starting time 3 - for each pre-set time, the day and
the time (hour and minute) can be set for switching on the auxiliary heating.
An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day. If this empty position is selected, the activation is performed
without taking into account the day.
■ Activate - Activate pre-set mode
■ Deactivate - Deactivate pre-set mode
■ Factory settings - Restore factory settings
■ Back - Return to main menu
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
After the auxiliary heating activates at the set time, it is necessary to pre-set a
time again.
If the pre-set menu is closed by selecting the menu item Back or if no changes
are made on the display for more than 10 seconds, the set values are stored,
but the pre-set time is not activated.
An indicator light on the button is illuminated when the system is running.
The system in operation switches off on expiration of the operating duration
or can be deactivated by pressing the direct on/off icon  or by using the radio
remote control.
Switching off the aux. heating takes place automatically when there is a lack
of fuel (warning light in the instrument cluster lights up).
Heating and ventilation
101
Display warning light B
Remote control
Fig. 120
Radio remote control
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
green or red.
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
flashes green or red.
Flashes orange for 5 seconds.

Read and observe
and
Replace the battery » page 166.
on page 100 first.
CAUTION
The remote control must be protected against moisture, severe shocks and
direct sunlight - there is a risk of damage to the remote control.
■ The range of the remote control with a charged battery is a few hundred metres (depending on obstructions between the remote control and the vehicle,
weather conditions, the battery condition etc.).
Description of the remote control » fig. 120
A Aerial
B Warning light
 Switch on aux. heating
 Switch off aux. heating
■
To switch the remote control on or off, hold the remote control vertically, with
the aerial B » fig. 120 pointing upwards. The antenna must not be covered
with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process.
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the remote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least
2 m.
Display warning light B
Lights up green for 2 seconds.
Lights up red for 2 seconds.
Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds.
Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.
Flashes red for 2 seconds.
102 Using the system
Meaning
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was received.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was not received.
The battery is discharged, however
the switching on or off signal was not
received.
Meaning
The auxiliary heating has been
switched on.
The auxiliary heating has been
switched off.
The ignition signal was not received.
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e.g.
because the tank is nearly empty or
there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.
The switch off signal was not received.
Notice
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. By doing this, the engine reaches its operating temperature faster.
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine

Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
Switch on/off ignition
Starting / stopping the engine
Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button
103
104
104
105
Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and
start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – There is a
risk of an accident!
■ While driving with the engine stopped the ignition must always be
switched on. Otherwise, the steering may lock - There is a risk of an accident!
■ Withdraw the ignition key from the lock after the car has come to a stop
» page 108, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock - danger of an accident!
■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
risk of an accident, theft and similar
■ Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in a closed place - there is the danger of poisoning and death!
■
CAUTION
Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a risk of starter and engine damage!
■ Do not push-start the engine – There is a risk of damaging the engine and
the catalytic converter! The battery from another vehicle can be used as a
jump-start aid.
■ On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is located. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been forgotten, for
example, in the front of the vehicle roof - danger of loss or damage to the key!
■
Read and observe
and
on page 103 first.
The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes the
theft or unauthorised use of your vehicle more difficult.
Immobiliser
The immobiliser allows the engine to start provided an original vehicle key only
is used.
Malfunction of the immobiliser
In the case of a failure in the immobilizer key components , the engine cannot
be started. In the display of the instrument cluster, a message appears stating
that the immobilizer is active.
To start the other vehicle keys you can avail of the help of a specialist garage.
Steering lock - locking
› On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until the steering lock engages.
› On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driver's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been
locked.
Steering lock - unlock
› On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the
ignition. If this is not possible, then move the steering wheel slightly back
and forth, as a result of which the steering lock should unlock.
› On vehicles with starter button, get into the vehicle and close the driver's
door. Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only
when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to roll with locked steering lock - there is a risk of
an accident!
Starting-off and Driving
103
Starting engine
› On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position 3 and the engine
starts» fig. 121 on page 104 . Then release the key, the engine will start automatically.
Switch on/off ignition
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Repeat the start-up process after 30 s.
› On vehicles withstarter button, press the button briefly» fig. 121 on page 104
- , the motor will start automatically.
For vehicles with Diesel engines the pre-heating warning light  illuminates
on starting. The engine starts after the warning light extinguishes.
Fig. 121 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button

Read and observe
and
on page 103 first.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock» fig. 121 - 
1 Ignition off, power engine off
2 Ignition switched on
3 Starting engine
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button
› Press the» fig. 121 - button, the ignition is turned on / off.
On vehicles with manual transmission the pedal must not be depressed to
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be depressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
Starting / stopping the engine

Read and observe
and
on page 103 first.
Before starting the engine
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts.
› For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
104 Driving
Switching the engine off
› Stop the vehicle.
› On vehicles withignition lock, turn the key to position 1 » fig. 121 on
page 104.
› On vehicles withstarter button, press the button» fig. 121 on page 104 - ,
The engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P .
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey if the engine has been working at high revs over a prolonged period, but leave it to run
at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation
of heat when the engine is switched off.
Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
› Keep the knob pressed» fig. 121 on page 104 - or press it twice within 1 second.
After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain unlocked.
CAUTION
When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when starting must always be in P mode.

Notice
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine.
■ You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may (also intermittently)
continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
■
Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button
The START-STOPSystem (hereinafter referred to only as system) reduces the
CO2Emissions as well as harmful emissions and saves fuel.
If the system realises that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
(e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it again when moving off.
The system function depends on many factors. Some of them, the driver has to
fulfil; the others are systemic and cannot be influenced or recognized.
Therefore, the system can react differently in situations which are identical
from the driver's point of view.
Fig. 122
Start engine - press button with
the key
At every instance of switching on the ignition the system is activated automatically (although previously deactivated manually with the key ).
Notice
If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains on.
Operation

Read and observe
and
Fig. 123
Prompt in the MAXI DOT display
on page 103 first.
If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a system
fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
› Press the starter button with the key » fig. 122.
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required.
CAUTION
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running
out of charge or the signal fails (strong electromagnetic field) or is shielded
(e.g. in an aluminium case).
START-STOPsystem

The engine is automatically startedas soon as the clutch pedal is pressed
down.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is automatically turnedoffwhen the vehicle comes to a standstill
and the brake pedal is operated.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
Manually activating/deactivating the system
Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine is automatically turned offonce the vehicle comes to a halt, put the
shift lever into the neutral position and the clutch pedal is released.
The engine is automatically startedas soon as the brake pedal is released.

105
106
Starting-off and Driving
105
Conditions for the system to function
The following basic conditions are required for the correct TSA function.
 The driver's door is closed.
 The driver has fastened the seat belt.
 The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after the last stop.
 No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
System state
The mode is indicated in the instrument cluster display.
The engine is automatically switched off and when starting up automatic rebooting is carried out.
  » fig. 123
 START-STOP ACTIVE
Notice
If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's
door is opened after the engine has switched off automatically, the engine will
have to be restarted manually.
■ There is no automatic engine shut-down when a vehicle with automatic
transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains stationary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shutdown
takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
■ For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shutdown when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
angle.
■
Manually activating/deactivating the system
The engine is not automatically switched off.
  » fig. 123
 START-STOP NOT POSSIBLE
The engine does not shut down when the vehicle stops, if e.g. the following
applies.
▶ The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
▶ The charging state of the vehicle battery is too low.
▶ Current consumption is too high.
▶ High air conditioning or heating output (high blower speed, big difference between the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine is shut down automatically and the system detects that the engine is required, such as when the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly, then the
system automatically starts the engine.
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Fig. 124
Button for the START-STOP system
› To deactivate/activate the system, press the button» fig. 124.
When the system is deactivated, the symbol in the button lights up.
If the system is turned off, then this is automatically activated again after
switching off and switching on the ignition.
Notice
If the system is automatically deactivated when the engine has been switched
off, then the automatic start-up process is triggered.
Brakes and parking

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Handbrake
Parking
106 Driving
107
108 
The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style. Under difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving style) the condition of the brakes should also be checked by a specialist garage between the
service intervals.
The performance of the brakes can be delayed if the brakes are damp, iced up
in winter or if covered in a layer of salt. The brakes are cleaned and dried by
applying the brakes several times » .
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads can occur if the vehicle
has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the
braking system. The brakes are to be cleaned by applying the brakes several
times » .
Before negotiating a long or steep gradient, reduce speed and shift down a
gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be used, reducing the
load on the brakes. If, nevertheless, there is a need for additional braking, it
should be carried out at intervals.
WARNING (Continued)
Do not depress the brake pedal, if there is no requirement to slow down.
This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking
distance and excessive wear - There is a risk of an accident!
■ Only brake for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the
traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
■ Recommendations for new brake pads should be followed.
■ When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be applied
firmly, otherwise the vehicle could move off - There is a risk of an accident!
■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
Otherwise, the front brakes could be in danger of overheating – There is a
risk of an accident!
■
Handbrake
Emergency braking warning - If it is necessary to brake hard, the system may
cause the brake lights to automatically flash, to alert the traffic behind.
Fig. 125
Handbrake
New brake pads must first be““run in”” because these do not initially have the
best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
If the brake fluid level is too low, it can cause faults in the braking system;
the warning light will light up in the instrument cluster » page 34,  Brake
system. If the warning light does not light up, yet the stopping distance is perceived to be longer than before, the driving style should be adapted in view of
the unknown cause of the problem, and braking kept to a minimum - seek the
help of a specialist garage without delay.
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
■ Greater physical effort for braking is required when the engine is switched off – risk of accident!
■ During the braking procedure on a vehicle with manual transmission,
when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs, press the clutch pedal. Otherwise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – accident risk!

Read and observe
on page 107 first.
The handbrake secures the vehicle against unwanted movement when stopping and parking.
Apply
› Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
Release
› Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the lock
button » fig. 125.
› Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning lightlights up when the handbrake is applied, provided the ignition is on.
Starting-off and Driving
107

A warning signal sounds if the vehicle inadvertently moves off with the handbrake applied. The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a
speed of over 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
Disengage the handbrake completely. A handbrake which is only partially
disengaged can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can have a negative effect on the operation and the service life of the brake system – accident risk!
Notice
Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the handbrake» page 73.
Manual shifting of gears and pedals

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
108
109
Manual gear changing
Pedals
Manual gear changing
Fig. 126
The shift pattern
Parking

Read and observe
on page 107 first.
For stopping and parking select a place with a suitable surface »
.
Perform the activities while parking only in the specified order.
› Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
› Apply the handbrake firmly.
› For vehicles with Automatic gearboxesplace the selector lever to position P .
› Switch off the engine.
› For vehicles with Manual transmission, select 1. gear or Reverse gear R.
› Release the brake pedal.
WARNING
■ The parts of the exhaust system may become very hot. Therefore, never
stop the vehicle in places where the underside of your vehicle could come
into contact with flammable materials (e.g. dry grass, leaves, spilled fuel or
the like). - There is a risk of fire and serious injury can be caused!
■ When leaving the vehicle never leave people unattended in the car who
could, for example, lock the vehicle or release the brake - There is a risk of
an accident and an injury!
On the gear lever, the shift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown
» fig. 126.
The gearshift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 41.
Always press the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear on
the clutch.
Reverse gear is engaged
› Stop the vehicle.
› Fully press down the clutch pedal.
› Switch the gear lever to N.
› Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into
R» fig. 126.
The reverse lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident or damage!
108 Driving

CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mechanism
to wear excessively.
Pedals
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
Only a floor mat (ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range)
which can be secured to the attachment points should be used in the driver's
footwell.
WARNING
There should be no objects in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal operation can be impeded - There is a risk of an accident!
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle stalls with the engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic
mode, then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away by means of
the brake pedal, parking brake or using the Auto Hold function. Even when
the engine is idling, the power transmission is never completely interrupted
– the vehicle crawls.
■ When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P. Otherwise, the vehicle could start to move - risk of accidents.
■
CAUTION
If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S whilst
driving, the engine must be running at idling speed.
Select selector lever position
Fig. 127
Selector lever settings / display
Automatic transmission

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Select selector lever position
Selector lever lock
Manual shifting (Tiptronic)
Starting-off and driving
109
110
110
111

Read and observe
and
on page 109 first.
The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective of
the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the
selected driving mode.
The selector lever can be moved through shifting to one of the following positions » fig. 127. In some positions you have to push the locking button
» page 110.
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » fig. 127.
WARNING
Do not accelerate when selecting drive mode prior to moving off - There
is a risk of an accident!
■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – There is a
risk of an accident!
■
Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill
The drive wheels are mechanically locked.
R Reverse gear - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill and the engine is at idling speed
N Neutral (idle position) - the power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted
P
Starting-off and Driving
109

D
S
Driving forwardsIn positionD, the forward gears are automatically
changed according to the engine load, accelerator pedal actuation and
driving speed
sport mode - the gear change takes place in the position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D
Before changing to mode S from mode D, press the lock button in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 128 on page 110.
Notice
If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D or vice versa,
move the selector lever quickly. This prevents that you accidentally selecting
mode R or N.
Manual shifting (Tiptronic)
Fig. 129
Selector lever
Selector lever lock
Fig. 128
Shift lock button


Read and observe
and
on page 109 first.
The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent forward driving being
selected inadvertently, thereby setting the vehicle in motion.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light .
Releasing selector lever from mode P or N
› Press the brake pedal and the lock button at the same time in the direction
of 1 » fig. 128.
To move the selector lever from mode N to D only the brake pedal is pressed.
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving via modes N (e.g. from R
to D). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, e.g. in a bank
of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for
more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed.
If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual manner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 168.
110
Driving
Read and observe
and
on page 109 first.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever.
This mode can be selected both while stopping and while driving.
Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever
› Push the gear selector from position D towards the right, or left in a righthand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained.
Changing gear
› To change up, tap the selector lever forwards + » fig. 129.
› To change down, tap the selector lever backwards - » fig. 129.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the display » fig. 127 on page 109.
The gearshift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 41.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
overrevving.
Notice
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual
shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and
hence the wear on the brakes.
Starting-off and driving

Read and observe
and
Running in and economical driving
on page 109 first.
Moving off and stopping temporarily
› Firmly press down and hold the brake pedal.
› Start the engine.
› Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position
» page 109.
› Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
short time (e.g. at a crossroads). However, the brake pedal should be depressed, in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
Accelerating at maximum speed during the journey (kickdown function)
If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is in forward drive mode,
the kick-down function is turned on.

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
111
111
Running in the engine
Tips on economical driving
Running in the engine
During the first 1 500 km, the driving style is decisive for successful the running in process is.
During the first 1 000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than
3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer.
From about 1 000 to 1 500 km the engine can be pushed up to the maximum
permitted engine speed.
The gear change is adjusted accordingly to achieve maximum acceleration.
Driving in neutral (“coasting”)1)
When releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle moves without the braking
effect of the engine.
Operating conditions
▶ The selector lever is in the D position.
▶ In the MAXI DOT Menu Display Settings
activate the menu item Coasting
» page 44.
▶ The vehicle is travelling at more than 20 km/h.
▶ No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
The gear is automatically engaged again by pressing down on either the accelerator or brake pedal.
WARNING
Rapid acceleration ( e.g. on slippery roads) can lead to a loss of control over
the vehicle – There is a risk of accident!
1)
Tips on economical driving
Fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road and weather conditions,
and similar such factors.
For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed.
▶ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
▶ Engage the recommended gear » page 41.
▶ Avoid full throttle and high speeds.
▶ Reduce idling.
▶ Avoid short distances.
▶ Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained » page 153.
▶ Avoid unnecessary ballast.
▶ Remove the roof rack before driving if it is not needed.
▶ Only turn on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as necessary.
▶ Briefly ventilate before turning on the cooling system, do not use the cooling
system with the windows open.
▶ Do not leave windows open at high speeds.
This function is only valid for some engines.
Starting-off and Driving
111
Avoiding damage to your vehicle

Driving through water
Introduction
Fig. 130
Maximum permissible water level when driving through water
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Driving Tips
Driving through water
112
112
Driving Tips
Only drive on roads and terrain that correspond to the vehicle parameters» page 177, Technical data.
The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can cope
with the conditions and the terrain.
When travelling off paved roads, we recommend activating the OFF ROAD
mode » page 115.
WARNING
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
■ Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
■
CAUTION
Pay attention to the ground clearance for the vehicle! When driving over objects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged.
■ Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as
soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. to parts of
the fuel or brake system).
■
112
Driving
The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving
through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads).
› Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of
water. The water level must not go above the lower edge of the lower sill
» fig. 130.
› Drive at no more than walking pace, otherwise a wave may form in front of
the vehicle, which could cause the water to enter into the vehicle’s systems
(e.g. the air intake system for the engine).
› Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
CAUTION
If water gets into the vehicle’s systems (e.g. the air intake system for the engine) it can cause serious damage to the vehicle!
■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle.
■ Do not drive through salt water, the salt can cause corrosion. A vehicle that
has come into contact with salt water should be rinsed with fresh water thoroughly.
■
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
Assistance systems
General information
WARNING
The ACC only serves to support and does not relieve the driver of the responsibility of operating the vehicle.
■ The increased safety offered as well as the increased occupant protection
offered by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take a security
risk – accident risk!
■ Adjust your speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
■ The system has physical and system related limitations. For this reason,
the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system responses in
certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and ready to intervene!
■ Only enable, disable and adjust the assistance system provided that you
have the car fully under control in every traffic situation– accident risk!
■
Stability Control (ESC)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
The ESC improves vehicle stability when driving at the limit (e.g. if the vehicle
starts to skid) by braking individual wheels to maintain the desired direction.
If there is a TCS intervention, the indicator light flashes in the instrument
cluster.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
Braking and stabilisation systems
The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of
the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.

When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Stability Control (ESC)
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Traction control (TCS)
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
Brake Assist (HBA)
Hill Start Assist (HHC)
Trailer stabilization system (TSA)
113
113
113
114
114
114
114
114
115
Engine drag torque control (MSR)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
MSR counteracts the tendency of the drive wheels to lock during downshifts
or sudden deceleration (e.g. on icy or an otherwise slippery road surface).
If the drive wheels should lock, then the engine speed is automatically increased. This reduces the braking effect of the engine and the wheels can rotate freely again.
The braking and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time
the ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.
The error display is to be removed in Chapter » page 33, Warning lights.
Assistance systems
113
Traction control (TCS)
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL
brakes a spinning wheel if required and transfers the drive power force to the
other drive wheel. This allows driving on road surfaces with different traction
under each wheel of the driven axle.
The EDL switches off automatically in order to avoid excessive heat generation
in the brake of the wheel where the brake is activated. Once the brakes have
cooled down, the automatic EDL is re-activated.
Fig. 131 Vehicle with ESC / vehicle without ESC

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
TCS prevents the spinning of the wheels of the driven axle. TCS reduces the
power transmitted on the wheels slipping. This for example allows passage on
roads with low grip.
During a TCS intervention, an indicator light flashes in the instrument cluster.
The deactivation/activation of TCS can be carried out, depending on equipment, in one of the following ways.
▶ By pressing the » fig. 131button.
▶ By pressing the » fig. 131button.
Duringdeactivation the warning lightlights up in the instrument cluster and
an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Duringactivation extinguished the warning light is and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
only in the following situations, for example.
▶ When driving with snow chains.
▶ When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
▶ When it is necessary to “rock” a car free when it has become stuck.
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
The DSR indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle. DSR is activated, for example, on the right
and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces.
Brake Assist (HBA)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance.
The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. To achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be applied
firmly until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill.
The HBA is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released.
Hill Start Assist (HHC)

Read and observe
on page 113 first.
When moving off on a gradient, HHC allows you to move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill.
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the
brake pedal.
The HHC is active on gradients upwards up 5 % if the driver door is closed. HAC
is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off.
114
Driving
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
■ A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to
shut down. This would lead the OFF ROAD mode to lose its effectiveness –
accident risk!
Trailer stabilization system (TSA)

Read and observe
■
on page 113 first.
The TSA helps to stabilise the trailer combination in situations where it comes
to trailer swaying and then the whole trailer combination.
TSA applies the brake to individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to
dampen the swaying motion of the entire vehicle combination.
For the correct TSA function, the following basic conditions are required.
 The coupling device was factory-fitted or purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
 The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the
trailer socket.
 The TCS is enabled.
 The speed is greater than 60 km/h.
CAUTION
The OFF ROAD mode is not designed for the use on common roads.
All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by
ŠKODA AUTOto ensure theOFF ROAD mode operates correctly.
■
■
Operation
Fig. 132
OFF ROAD button
Further information » page 127, Towing device and trailer.
OFF ROADmode

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
Hill Descent Assistant
ASR OFF ROAD
EDS OFF ROAD
ABS OFF ROAD
Start-Off assist
115
116
116
116
116
117
The OFF ROAD mode includes several features that help you to overcome difficult navigable routes when travelling outside of paved roads.
But even with OFF ROAD mode activated, your vehicle is never a true SUV.

Read and observe
and
on page 115 first.
We recommend activating the OFF ROAD mode for every trip outside paved
roads.
› To activate, press the » fig. 132button.
The symbol in the button comes on.
› to deactivatepress the key  » fig. 132 or switch off the ignition.
The symbol in the button is no longer illuminated.
To allow the intervention of the OFF ROAD mode, the following conditions
must be met.
 The OFF ROAD mode is enabled.
 The vehicle is moving at a speed of more than 30 km/h.
 The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster .
Assistance systems
115

The following functions are integrated in the OFF ROAD mode.
116.
▶ Downhill Drive Support » page
▶ TCS OFF ROAD » page 116.
▶ EDL OFF ROAD » page 116.
▶ ABS OFF ROAD » page 116.
▶ Start-Off Assistant » page 117.
Notice
If the engine stalls while driving and is started again within 30 seconds, then
OFF ROAD mode will be automatically activated.
Read and observe
and
WARNING
For the correct operation of the assistant, the road surface must be sufficiently adhesive. Assistant cannot properly fulfil its function on slushy soil
due to physical reasons (e.g. ice or mud). - risk of accident!
Notice
During an intervention of the assistant, the brake lights do not light up.
Hill Descent Assistant

By pressing the accelerator or brake pedal, the speed can be increased or reduced. This is true even if the shift lever is in the neutral position and the selector lever in the N position. The engagement of the assistant is resumed after the pedal is released.
on page 115 first.
The hill descent assistant (hereinafter referred to as assistant), using its automatic braking action on all wheels, ensures a constant speed on a steep slope
when driving forward and reversing.
During an intervention of the assistant, the warning light  flashes in the instrument cluster.
The hill assistant is automatically engaged under the following conditions.
 The engine is running.
 For vehicles with Manual transmission the shift lever is in the neutral position and or the 1., 2., 3. gear, or reverse gear is engaged.
 On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the R,
N, D, S position or in the Tiptronic position.
 The downhill gradient is at least 10 % (when driving over sleepers the limit
can briefly drop to 8 %).
 Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is operated.
Driving speed
Initiate the downhill decent at a reasonable speed up to 30 km/h the hill descent assist maintains this speed when driving downhill constant.
The assistant can maintain a constant speed of about 2 - 30 km/h.
If a forward or reverse gear is engaged for vehicles with Manual transmission,
the speed must be high enough to avoid stalling the engine.
ASR OFF ROAD

Read and observe
and
on page 115 first.
The ASR OFF ROAD makes starting and driving on an unpaved surface easier
as it partially allows wheel-spin.
Notice
When disabled, the TCS » page 114 OFF ROAD mode works without the support
of OFF ROADTCS.
EDS OFF ROAD

Read and observe
and
on page 115 first.
The EDS supports OFF ROAD vehicle traction when driving on a surface with
different grip under the drive wheels or when driving over bumps.
A spinning wheel or wheels are braked earlier and with more force than with
the intervention of the standard EDS system.
ABS OFF ROAD

Read and observe
and
on page 115 first.
The ABS OFF ROAD supports the driver when braking on an unpaved surface
such as gravel, snow, etc.
The system generated by a controlled locking of the wheels braked wheel before a “wedge” of piled material, which shortens the braking distance.
116
Driving

The system is only available, if the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
The system operates at speeds of up to 50 km/h.
Start-Off assist 1)

Read and observe
and
on page 115 first.
The Start-Off assist helps the driver when starting such as with a steep slope
or on a greasy surface. When the driver presses the accelerator, the maximum
engine speed is electronically limited so that a gentle approach is possible.
CAUTION
Keep the system sensors » fig. 133 on page 117 clean, snow-and ice-free and
do not cover with any objects of any kind, otherwise the system functionality
may be impaired.
■ In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
temperatures, etc.), the functioning of the system may be impaired - “incorrect
recognition of obstacles”.
■ Additionally installed accessories such as bicycle carriers can impair the system functionality.
■
Functionality
Parking assistance (ParkPilot)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functionality
Display in the Infotainment display
Activation / deactivation
117
118
119
The parking aid (hereinafter referred to only as a system) draws attention via
acoustic signals and an indication in Infotainment display when manoeuvring
around obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Fig. 133 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehicle:
front / rear
WARNING
The general information relating to using assistance systems is to be observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
■ Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such objects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
There is a danger that obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■ Before reversing, you should satisfy yourself that there are no small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post etc., in front or behind your vehicle. Such
obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors.
■
1)
Only valid for vehicles with a petrol engines and manual gearboxes.
Assistance systems
117

Fig. 134
Sampled areas and range of the
sensors

Read and observe
and
Notice
If, for vehicles with Variant 3 not all fields around the vehicle are shown after
the system is activated, the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or reversed a few metres.
■ The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
■ The sound of the park-assist can be adjusted via the MAXI DOT display in the
Assistants menu option » page 45.
■
Display in the Infotainment display
on page 117 first.
Fig. 135
Display
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » fig. 133.
Depending on the equipment fitted, the following system variants are possible » fig. 134.
▶ Variant 1: warns of obstacles in the areas C , D .
▶ Variant 2: warns of obstacles in the areas A , B , C , D .
▶ Variant 3: warns of obstacles in the regions A , B , C , D , E .

Approximate range of sensors (in cm)
Area » fig. 134
Variant 1
(4 sensors)
Variant 2
(8 sensors)
Variant 3
(12 sensors)
A
160
60
-
120
60
160
60
-
120
60
160
60
60
B
C
D
E
Audible signals
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound danger zone. From this moment do not continue to move towards the obstacle!
Towing a trailer
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket,
only the A and B » fig. 134 areas are active in the system.
118
Driving
Read and observe
and
on page 117 first.
Functional interfaces and obstacle warning » fig. 135
 Change to rear-view camera display.
 Switch off the parking aid.
   Switching on / off the audible parking aid.
 Message: Look! Safe to move?
A An area without detected obstacles is shown as a transparent segment.
B An obstacle that is currently outside the collision area is shown by the yellow segment.
C An obstacle appearing in the collision area is shown as a red-coloured segment.  Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle!
Activation / deactivation
Reversing camera
Fig. 136
System key (option 2, 3)

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
120
120
Operation
Guidelines and function interfaces
The rear view camera (hereinafter only referred to as system) helps the driver
when parking and manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle on
the Infotainment display (hereinafter only referred to as display).

Read and observe
and
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
■ The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system function
will be significantly affected - there is a risk of an accident. For information
on cleaning » page 138, Exterior vehicle care.
on page 117 first.
■
Activation
The activation of the system is initiated when the reverse gear is engaged, or,
with vehicles with thevariant 2 and 3, also by pressing the » fig. 136button.
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol illuminates in the button.
Deactivation
On vehicles with Version 1, the system is deactivated by changing from reverse
gear.
For vehicles withversion 2 and 3, the system is automatically deactivated by
pressing the button or at a speed above 15 km/h (the symbol in the button
goes out).
Fault display
If a warning signal sounds for 3 seconds after activating the system and there
is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is also
indicated by the symbol  flashing in the button. Seek help from a specialist
garage.
CAUTION
The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. This display indication is therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following
vehicles.
■ Some items, such as thin columns, chain link fences or lattice, may not be
represented adequately in terms of display resolution.
■ In a crash or in the case of vehicle damage, the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor
checked by a specialist garage.
■
Notice
The system can only be activated with the button at a speed of below 15
km/h.
Assistance systems
119
Operation
Guidelines and function interfaces
Fig. 137 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the vehicle

Read and observe
and
on page 119 first.
The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the luggage compartment lid » fig. 137.
Area behind the vehicle » fig. 137
A Detection range of the camera
B Area outside the detection range of the camera
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the following basic conditions.
 The ignition is switched on.
 Reverse gear is engaged.1)
 The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
 The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible.
 The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
Notice
The display can be interrupted by pressing the symbol key » fig. 136 on
page 119.
■ After moving out of reverse gear an automatic display of the parking aid appears (variant 2 and 3) » page 117.
■
1)
The area behind the vehicle may be displayed for a few seconds after removing the reverse gear.
120 Driving
Fig. 138 Infotainment display: Orientation lines / function interfaces

Read and observe
and
on page 119 first.
Orientation lines are shown on the display along with the monitored area behind the vehicle.
Distance of the orientation lines behind the vehicle » fig. 138
A The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
B The distance is about 100 cm.
C The distance is about 200 cm.
The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the
road inclination.
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle
width including mirrors.
Functional interfaces » fig. 138
   Depending on the Infotainment Type: Turns the display of the area behind the vehicle off
 Display settings - brightness, contrast, colour
   Switching audible parking signals on/off
   Switching park assistance display on/off
 Change to park assistance display

WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
the spokes of the steering wheel – risk of injury!
■ During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
ice, etc.) you may deviated from the calculated road area. Therefore, it is
recommended that you do not use the system in such situations.
CAUTION
The objects shown in the display can be closer or even further away than they
appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
■ Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
■ Driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
■ Driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
■
Park Assist

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Functioning
Parking space search
Parking
Manoeuvring out of a parking space parallel to the road
Automatic brake assist
Malfunctions
121
122
123
123
124
124
Park Assist (hereinafter only referred to as the system) helps drivers park in
suitable parallel and perpendicular parking places and also manoeuvre out of
parallel parking spaces.
The system takes over the steering movements only when parking or leaving a
parking space. The driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and
the shift / selector lever.
The state, in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
as the parking operation.
The Park Assist is an extension of the parking aid » page 117 and operates on
the basis of data collected by the ultrasonic sensors.
For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is to be read carefully and the
safety notes are to be observed.
CAUTION
The evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depends on
the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size
approved by ŠKODA AUTO.
■ Abstain from using the system when the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or
a temporary spare wheel.
■ If wheels other than those approved by ŠKODA AUTO are fitted, the resulting
position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.
CAUTION
If other vehicles are parked behind or on the curb, the system can drive your
vehicle over the kerb or up to the kerb - there is a risk of damage to the
wheels. Intervene in good time if necessary.
Notice
We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km/h.
The parking procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing the
» fig. 139 on page 122button or by a steering intervention.
■
■
Functioning

Read and observe
and
on page 121 first.
The system support is provided in the following manner.
▶ While the parking space search is going on, a measurement and evaluation of
the parking space size is completed.
▶ Suitable parking spaces are shown in the display of the instrument cluster

(hereinafter only in the display).
Assistance systems
121
▶ The
display shows instructions and information before the start and during
the parking.
▶ Based on the calculated road surface, the front wheels will be automatically
rotated during the parking.
Conditions for the system function
The system can look for a parking space only if the following basic conditions
are met.
 The system is activated.
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 40 km/h.
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 20 km/h.
 The distance to a number of parked vehicles is approximately 0.5-1.5 m.
 TCS is activated » page 114.
The system can only carry out the parking procedure if the following basic conditions are met.
 The vehicle is travelling at less than 7 km/h.
 The parking procedure takes less than 6 minutes.
 There is no driver intervention in the automatic steering operation.
 TCS is activated » page 114.
 The TCS does not engage.
 No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
Activation/deactivation
The system can be activated/deactivated by pressing the button» fig. 139 on
page 122 - .
When the system is activated, the symbol illuminates.
Parking space search
Fig. 139 System button / display

Read and observe
and
on page 121 first.
The system searches for a parking space in a number of parallel and transverse
parked vehicles on the passenger or driver's side.
Search for a parking space parallel to the roadway
› Slowly drive past a row of parallel parked vehicles.
› Press the buttononce to» fig. 139 -.
The display shows the following .
Search for a parking space traverse to the roadway
› Slowly drive past a row of traverse parked vehicles.
› Press the buttontwice » fig. 139.
The display shows the following .
Change sides for the parking
The system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger
side.
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to look fro a parking
space on this side of the road. The display changes and the system searches
for a parking space on the driver's side.
Notice
If the symbol  (km/h) is shown in the display while you are looking for a parking space, the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km/h (parallel parking) or below 20 km/h (Transverse parking).
122
Driving
› Press down the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically
Parking
rotates into the required position, the symbol  goes out.
› Carefully drive forward.
› If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display - , select reverse gear
again or move the selector lever into position R.
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
› Press down the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically
rotates into the required position, the symbol  is extinguished.
› Carefully move backwards.
You can repeat these steps several times in succession.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the display.
Fig. 140 Display

Read and observe
and
on page 121 first.
Manoeuvring out of a parking space parallel to the road
The system supports the driver when reverse parking in the parking space
found in a number of traverse and parallel parked vehicles.

Display » fig. 140
 Parking space recognised with the information to drive on
 Parking space recognised with the information to reverse
 Note to drive into the parking space
 Note to reverse into the parking space
The system supports the driver when leaving a parking space of a parallel
parking space.
Parking manoeuvre
The parking space found is shown in the display» fig. 140 - .
› Continue driving forwards until appears in the display.
› Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue moving forward until the
parking procedure starts.
Read and observe
and
on page 121 first.
Leaving a parking space process
› Press the symbol button » fig. 139 on page 122.
The following message is displayed: PARK ASSIST Turn on turn signal and select reverse
gear
› Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out
of which you wish to manoeuvre.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.
› Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
› As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. active.
› Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps.
If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to use the system to leave
the parking space. A corresponding message is shown in the information cluster display.
Monitor area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering will be taken
over by the system.
› Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
› If the arrow in the display is flashing to the front , engage 1. gear or move
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and
the following message appears in the display.
the selector lever into the position D.
The display shows the  icon (brake pedal).
Assistance systems
123
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
actuate the accelerator pedal. The state where the CCS maintains the speed is
referred to as Control.
Automatic brake assist

Read and observe
and
on page 121 first.
Automatic brake assist in speeding
If during the parking manoeuvre, a velocity of 7 km/h is exceeded for the first
time, then the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to 7 km/h.
This ensures discontinuation of the parking is avoided.
Automatic emergency braking
If the system detects a risk of impact during the parking, automatic emergency
braking is applied to reduce the consequences of any collision.
Parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
Malfunctions
Read and observe
and
on page 121 first.
If, for some unknown reason, the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of the instrument cluster.
System unavailable
If the system is not available because the vehicle has a fault, a message appears concerning the unavailability. Seek help from a specialist garage.
System fault
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Speed control system

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Operation
Operation description
124 Driving
Operation

Read and observe
on page 124 first.
Basic requirements for start of control
 The CCS is activated.
 On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher is engaged.
 On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the D/S
position or in the Tiptronic position.
 The current speed is higher than 20 km/h.
CAUTION
The automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system when the
parking process stops due to the speed of 7 km/h being exceeded!

WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
124
125
This, however, is only possible to the extent permitted by the engine output
and braking power of the vehicle.
WARNING
If the engine output or engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain the
set speed, the driver must assume control of the accelerator and brake
pedals!
Operation description
Fig. 141
Cruise control system controls
Notice
When under control, the speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator
pedal. Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to
the set speed.
Fatigue detection
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter referred to only as system) recommends the driver taking a break from driving when, because of the driver's
steering behaviour, driver fatigue is detected.

Read and observe
on page 124 first.
Overview of the CCS controls » fig. 141
A 
CCS activation (control deactivated)

Stop control (sprung position)

Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
B 
Take control again a) / Increase speed
C 
Start control / reduce speed
a)
If no speed is set the current speed is adopted.
Once the controls are activated, the CCS maintains the vehicle at the set
speed; the indicator light lights up in the instrument cluster.
After the control has been interrupted the stored speed can be resumed again
by pressing the button B .
Controls are automatically interrupted if any of the following occur.
▶ By pressing the brake or clutch pedal.
▶ When one of the brake assist systems
▶ Through an airbag deployment.
(e.g. ESC) intervenes.
WARNING
Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent unintentional switching on of the system.
■ Control may only be resumed if the set speed is not too high for the current traffic conditions.
■
From the starting of the journey, the system evaluates the steering behaviour
at speeds 65-200 km/h. If, while driving, changes in the steering behaviour occur that are evaluated by the system as a possible fatigue, the system issues a
break recommendation.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
▶ The vehicle is stopped and the ignition is turned off.
▶ The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt is taken off and the driver's door is
opened.
▶ The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
If none of these conditions are met or if the steering is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
The system can be activated / deactivated in the MAXI DOT display » page 45.
Pause recommendation
The symbol appears and the following message for a few seconds in the instrument cluster display  and a message about detected fatigue. An audible
signal is also emitted.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
■ The driver is driving always responsible for his ability. Never drive if you
feel tired.
■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
■
Assistance systems
125

Notice
In some situations, the system may evaluate the steering incorrectly and
thus mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather conditions or poor road conditions).
■ The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
■
Tyre pressure monitoring
Fig. 142
Button for storing the pressure
values
The tyre pressure monitoring function monitors (hereinafter referred to only as
a system) the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster and an audible signal is heard» page 38,  Tyre pressure.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed tyre
pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.
Procedure for storing the tyre pressure values
› Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure.
› Switch on the ignition.
› Press the button  » fig. 142 and keep it pressed down.
The warning light  illuminates in the instrument cluster.
An acoustic signal sounds and the warning light extinguishes informs that the
storage of the tyre pressure values has taken place.
› Release the button  release.
The tyre pressure valuesare always stored in the system, if one of the following events is present.
▶ Change of tyre pressure.
▶ Change of one or more wheels.
▶ Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
▶ The warning light in the instrument cluster.
126 Driving
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems is to be
observed » page 113, in chapter General information,
■ The correct tyre pressure values is always the driver's responsibility. The
tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 153.
■ The system cannot warn in case of sudden tyre inflation pressure loss,
e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
■ Before storing the tyre pressures they must be inflated to the specified
inflation pressure » page 153. If incorrect pressure values are stored, the
system may not warn even with a tyre pressure that is too low.
■
CAUTION
The tyre pressure values should be stored every 10,000 km or once a year to
ensure proper system function.
Description
Towing device and trailer
Towing device

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description
Setting the ready position
Check the standby position setting
Assemble the ball rod
Check proper mounting
Removing ball rod- Step 1
Removing ball rod - Step 2
Vertical load with mounted accessories
127
128
128
128
129
129
130
130
The maximum trailer nose weight when towing a trailer is 80 kg,for vehicles
with four-wheel drive and the 2.0 l / 103 kW TDI CR or 2.0 l / 110 kW TDI CR
engine, it is 85 kg. Other data (e.g. shown on the nameplate of the hitch) on
provides information about the test values of the device.
WARNING
Before each time you make a journey when using the ball rod, check that
it is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess.
■ When the ball rod is not properly used and secured in the receiving shaft,
it is damaged or incomplete, it must not be used - there is a risk of an accident.
■ Do not perform any modifications or changes to the towing device.
■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing device clean at all times. Such
dirt prevents the ball rod from being attached securely!
■
Fig. 143 Carrier of the towing device/ball rod

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
The ball rod is detachable and is located in the storage compartment for the
spare / emergency wheel.
Support for the towing device and tow bar » fig. 143
1 13-pin power socket
2 Mounting recess
3 Safety eyelet
4 Cover for the mounting recess
5 Dust cap
6 Locking ball
7 Green marking on the handwheel
8 Handwheel
9 Keys
10 Lock cap
11 Red marking on the handwheel
12 Green box on the tow bar
13 Tow bar
Towing device and trailer
127
Setting the ready position

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
Correctly adjusted standby position » fig. 145
 The locking balls A can be pushed fully into the tow bar.
 The red marking B on the handwheel is located in the green box on the
tow bar.
 The key C is in the unlocked position and cannot be removed.
 There is a clear gap of approx. 5 mm D between the hand wheel and the
ball rod.
When in the ready position, the key cannot be removed from the lock. The adjusted tow bar is ready for installation.
Fig. 144 Unlock lock / pull-out and rotate handwheel

Read and observe
Assemble the ball rod
on page 127 first.
The tow bar must be set prior to installation to the standby position
» page 128, Check the standby position setting.
› Hold the tow bar below the protective cap
› Remove the cap from the lock.
› Insert the key into the lock.
› Turn the key A in direction of the arrow 1 to the stop » fig. 144.
› Pull the handwheel B in the direction of the arrow 2 and drag in the direction of the arrow 3 to the stop. The hand wheel B remains locked in this
position.
Check the standby position setting
Fig. 145 Ready position
128 Driving
Fig. 146 Removing the cap on the rear bumper/inserting the tow bar

Check proper mounting
Fig. 148
Correctly connected tow bar
Fig. 147 Locking the lock and removing the key/replacing the lock cap

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
› Grip the cap on the rear bumper
B » fig. 146 at the handle A release in the
direction of the arrow 1 and remove in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Pull off the cover for the mounting recess 4 » fig. 143 on page 127 in the direction of the arrow.
› Adjust the ball rod to the ready position » page 128.
› Grip the ball rodfrom underneath » fig. 146 and insert into the mounting recess in arrow direction 3 until you hear it click into place. The ball rod must
audibly snap into place » .
The handwheel C » fig. 146 returns automatically and rests on the tow bar
» .

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
Correctly secured ball rod » fig. 148
 The tow bar does not come off the mounting recess even after strong
“shaking”.
 The green marking A on the handwheel is located in the green box on the
tow bar.
 The steering wheel is tight against the ball rod.
 The key is removed and the cap C attached to the lock.
Removing ball rod- Step 1
› Lock the handwheel lock by turning the key
D » fig. 147 to the left in the direction of the arrow 4 to the stop, and remove the key in the direction of
the arrow 5 .
› Put the cap E onto the handwheel lock in the direction of the arrow 6 .
› Check the tow bar for proper attachment » page 129.
WARNING
When attaching the tow bar, do not hold the handwheel by hand - risk of
injuring fingers!
■ Carefully remove the cap for the mounting recess - there is a risk of hand
injury!
■
Fig. 149 Removing the lock cover/releasing the lock

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
No trailer or other accessory may be connected to the tow bar. We recommend
putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the ball rod.
Towing device and trailer
129

› Remover the cover
A from the handwheel lock in the direction of the arrow
1 » fig. 149.
› Insert the key into the handwheel lock.
› Turn the key B as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow
2.
Removing ball rod - Step 2
The ball rod must always be cleaned before storing in the box with the vehicle
tool.
WARNING
Never allow the tow bar to remain unsecured in the luggage compartment.
This could cause damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put
the safety of the occupants at risk!
Vertical load with mounted accessories
Fig. 151
Representation of the maximum
length of the mounted accessories and the permissible total
weight of the accessory depending on the load centre of gravity
Fig. 150 Removing the tow bar/placing the cover on the rear bumper

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
Removal
› Grip the tow bar from below and with the other hand pull the handwheel C
in the direction of the arrow 3 » fig. 150.
› Turn the handwheel in the direction of the arrow 4 to the limit stop and
hold in this position.
› Remove the tow bar from the mounting recess downwards and in the direction of the arrow 5 . At the same time, the ball rod latches into the ready position and is therefore ready to be re-fitted.
After removing the ball rod
› Attach the cover for the mounting recess 4 » fig. 143 on page 127.
› Grip the cover on the rear bumper E » fig. 150 at the handle D and position
in the direction of the arrow 6 on the checkmark underneath the upper
edge of the bumper.
› Push this cover onto the lower edge and onto the two sides in the direction
of the arrow 7 .
If the hand wheel A is not turned all the way to the stop, then it will return to
its initial position when the ball rod is removed and will rest on the ball rod and
not engage into the ready position. The ball rod will then need to be brought
into this position before the next time it is installed» page 128.
130 Driving

Read and observe
on page 127 first.
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the
permissible total weight including load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing
device) is 70 cm » fig. 151.
The total permitted weight of the accessories including load changes with increasing distance of the load centre of gravity from the ball head of the towing
device.
Distance of the load centre of gravity
from the ball head
Permissible total weight of the accessories, including load
0 cm
30 cm
60 cm
70 cm
75 kg
75 kg
35 kg
0 kg

CAUTION
Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and
maximum length of the accessories - There is a risk of damage to the towing
device.
Notice
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Using hitch
connect and disconnect trailer (accessory)
Fig. 152
13-pin socket swivel, and safety
eyelet
Connect and disconnect
› Install the tow bar.
› Swing the 13-pin socket in the direction of arrow A » fig. 152.
› Remove the protective cap 5 » fig. 143 on page 127.
› Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the trailer ball.
› Plug the trailer cable into 13-pin socket A » fig. 152. (If the trailer / accessories have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding reduction piece from the
ŠKODA Original Accessories).
› Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet B (the
breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
Uncoupling is carried out in reverse order.
Exterior mirrors
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors.
1)
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights » page 611).
Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
switched on and off).
With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connected consumers.
At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (accessories) is interrupted.
WARNING
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
■ Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
and the trailer (accessories) -There is a risk of an accident or serious injury
from electrical shock.
■ After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory)
the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
■ Never use the securing eye to tow - There is a risk of an accident!
■
CAUTION
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can
lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics.
Loading a trailer
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 153.
Distribution of the cargo
Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping.
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Nevertheless, maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot
avoid driving with this combination.
Applies to vehicles with xenon headlights.
Towing device and trailer
131

WARNING
An unsecured load can adversely affect stability and driving safety significantly - risk of accident!
Trailer
The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.
Permissible towable mass
Engine
Gearbox
2.0 l/81 kW TDI CR
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR
MG
MG 4x4
a)
Permissible trailer weight braked (kg)
Gradients of up to 12 %
Gradients of up to 8%a)
1500
2100
1500
2100
Permissible trailer weight unbraked (kg)
700
750
Only valid for some countries.
WARNING
The maximum vertical load and the maximum trailer load must not be exceeded - there is risk of an accident!
Towing a trailer
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive with the trailer any faster than 100 km/h
(when the towing vehicle is a passenger car of category M1) or 80 km/h (when
the towing vehicle is a truck of category N1).
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accelerating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as
a brake.
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
132
Driving
CAUTION
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.
Anti-theft alarm system
The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (hereinafter only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory)
is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is
coupled or uncoupled » page 54.
Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system.
 The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
device.
 The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by
means of the trailer socket.
 The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional.
 The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
 The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED tail lights.
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
General Maintenance

Care and Maintenance
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
Tests required by law
ŠKODA service partner
The ŠKODA Original parts
The ŠKODA Original Accessories
Spoiler
Component protection
Airbags
The return and recycling of used vehicles
on page 133 first.
If you would like you operate your vehicle in countries other than its intended
weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA Partner. He or she will advise
you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full functioning of
the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant, changing the battery or similar).
Service work, modifications and technical alterations

Read and observe
133
133
133
134
134
134
134
134
135
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when
using accessories or carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition.
WARNING
■ Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle should only be
carried out by a specialist. Work carried out incorrectly (including work on
the electronic components and their software) can result in malfunctions there is a risk of accident and, potentially, increased wear on parts!
■ We recommend that you use only ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA
Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle.
Reliability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
■ Do not use any products which have not been approved by ŠKODA AUTO,
even though these may be products with a type approval or which have
been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
Tests required by law

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability, safety and,
where applicable, roadworthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle
to be tested at regular intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops
or testing stations that have been legally authorized for this purpose.
The ŠKODA Service partners can prepare your vehicle for the official inspections, so as to ensure that it passes.
Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for
prior checking in preparation for a legally required test, we recommend that
you consult your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand.
ŠKODA service partner

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
All ŠKODA service partners work according to the instructions and guidelines
from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore carried out on
time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these guidelines and instructions helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical
condition.
We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
Care and Maintenance
133
The ŠKODA Original parts

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts comply wholly with ŠKODA
AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series production.
ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these
products.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
The ŠKODA Original Accessories

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the following:
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO has selected these accessories to ensure that they are reliable,
safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor
the market, we are not able to assess or vouch the suitability of other products
for your vehicle, despite the fact that some products may have operational approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Accessories for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with the
materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement
or any other agreements.
Spoiler

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a Genuine Accessories spoiler on the front
bumper in combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following instructions must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries!
■ The vehicle can only be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper in
combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid.
■ A Genuine Accessories spoiler cannot be fitted to the front bumper either
on its own (without a spoiler on the boot lid) or in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the boot lid.
■ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any repairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
■ Unprofessional work carried out on the spoilers of your vehicle may result
in some functions/vehicle systems malfunctioning.
Component protection

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are factory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limitation of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle
(e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.
Airbags

Read and observe
on page 133 first.
WARNING
Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also seriously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
■ A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-approved wheels and tire combinations, can impair the functioning of the airbag system - There is a risk of accidents and fatal injury!
■
134 General Maintenance

WARNING
No changes may be made to airbag system components, the front bumper and the bodywork.
■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might result in the airbag being deployed.
■ If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must be replaced.
■
WARNING
The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can impair the functioning of the airbag system -There is a risk of accidents
and fatal injuries! The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Any work on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by
a specialist garage.
■ Never drive the vehicle with the inner door panels removed or with openings in the panelling.
The return and recycling of used vehicles

Read and observe
The specified service intervals are tailored to normal operating conditions.
In the case of aggravated operating conditions, it will be necessary to have
some service work carried out before the date of the next regular service or
between the specified service intervals. This applies mainly to the cleaning or
the replacement of the air filter insert in regions with heavy dust pollution as
well as checking and replacing the toothed belt, but also to vehicles with diesel particle filters, which can put greater strain on the engine oil.
The following is taken to mean aggravated operating conditions:
▶ Fuel with sulphur content.
▶ Frequent short trips.
▶ Longer periods of engine idling (e.g. taxis).
▶ Operation in areas with heavy dust pollution.
▶ Frequent trailer operation.
▶ Predominantly stop-and-go traffic as is e.g. often the case in city driving.
▶ Operation predominantly during winter.
You will be told at the specialist garage whether the operating conditions of
your vehicle may make it necessary for service work to be carried out between
the normal service intervals.
Different service charges may apply according to the particular scope of work
required, the vehicle type and specification, and your vehicle’s condition.
on page 133 first.
Notice
The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including
changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless stated otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other agreements.
■ You will be informed about the service checks and actions at each service by
the specialist garage.
All new ŠKODA vehicles are 95% recyclable.
■
Service intervals

The completion of services can be verified through the printed verification
from the digital service schedule and the respective receipts.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Overview of service intervals
Fixed service intervals QI1 - QI4
Variable service interval QI6
Digital Service Plan
136
136
136
137
The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will remind
you to carry out every service stipulated by the manufacturer at the right time
in order to prevent you from forgetting any» page 46.
Care and Maintenance
135
Inspectionb)
Variant 1
Overview of service intervals
Inspectionb)
Variant 2
Inspectionb)
Variant 3
Brake fluid
change
Fig. 153
Vehicle data: Service Interval
a)
b)
In order to operate a vehicle with a variable service interval, it must only be
filled and topped up with the prescribed engine oil.
If this engine oil is not available, the oil change is subject to a fixed service interval. In this case, the vehicle must be changed to the fixed service interval.
Notice
The corresponding motor oil specifications » page 146.
For vehicles with flexible service interval QI6 you can initiate a return to the
fixed service interval or back to the flexible service interval to be performed by
a specialist garage.
■
■
Oil change service
Every 5 000 km or every 1 yeara).
Every 7 500 km or every 1 yeara).
Every 10 000 km or every 1 yeara).
Every 15 000 km or every 1 yeara).
QI1 - QI4 First change after 3 years, then every 2 years.
Depending on which comes first.
For information about the variant that applies to your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA partner.
Variable service interval QI6
The oil change service intervals depend on the intensity at which the vehicle is
driven and the local conditions in which the vehicle is used. For example, your
vehicle is subjected to different demands when driven over short distances
than when driven over long distances. Therefore, the intervals are variable.
Oil change service
Inspectionb)
Variant 1
Inspectionb)
Variant 2
Brake fluid
change
a)
b)
136 General Maintenance
Every 10 000 km or every 1 yeara).
Notice
For diesel operation with a high sulphur content, an oil change service must be
carried out every 7 500 km. Ask your specialist garage for information on the
countries where diesel fuel has a high sulphur content.
Fixed service intervals QI1 - QI4
QI1
QI2
QI3
QI4
QI1 - QI4 Every 15 000 km or every 1 yeara).
WARNING
The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then every 2 years. Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause
vapour bubbles to form in the brake system when braking sharply. This can
impair the efficiency of the brakes –There is a risk of an accident!
The service interval specified by the manufacturer is indicated on the vehicle
data carrier» fig. 153 which can be found both in this Owner's Manual as well as
in the vehicle.
One of the following service intervals applies for your vehicle.
▶ Fixed service interval QI1.
▶ Fixed service interval QI2.
▶ Fixed service interval QI3.
▶ Fixed service interval QI4.
▶ Variable service interval QI6.
After the first 30 000 km or 2 yearsa), then every
30 000 km or every 1 yeara).
In accordance with the service interval display (after 30
000 km or 2 yearsa) at the latest).
After the first 30 000 km or 2 yearsa), then every 30 000
km or every 1 yeara).
Every 15 000 km or every 1 yeara).
First change after 3 years, then every 2 years.
Depending on which comes first.
For information about the variant that applies to your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA partner.

WARNING
The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then every 2 years. Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause
vapour bubbles to form in the brake system when braking sharply. This can
impair the efficiency of the brakes –There is a risk of an accident!
Digital Service Plan
We therefore recommend that you always have the record of work carried out
in a service printed out for you.
Benefits of the Digital Service Plan
▶ High level of security when it comes to the manipulation of the event entries.
▶ Transparent documentation of service work carried out.
▶ Protection against loss or damage of the entries – you receive a complete
service record of the work carried out, if required.
▶ Optional; request of complete verification in electronic form.
▶ The vehicle can be serviced in any specialist garage (also abroad)
– the database is accessible worldwide.
▶ Increased transparency when purchasing a used vehicle due to entries being
stored centrally.
▶ The system entries support you in making a claim on the ŠKODA extended
warranty and mobility guarantees.
Notice
We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and maintained at a ŠKODA service
partner.
Car washing

Read and observe
and
on page 137 first.
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhered to the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental
their destructive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
It is also essential to thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
Cleaning and care
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Car washing
Exterior vehicle care
Caring for the interior
CAUTION
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
■ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - There is a risk
of damaging the surface to be cleaned.
■
A specialist garage will not record the work carried out in a service evidence in
this Owner's Manual, but in the service information system called Digital Service Plan.

WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not completely independent, e.g. children - there is a risk of poisoning!
■
137
138
140
Washing by hand
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, with a soft sponge or a wash mitt and
plenty of water, and, if necessary, with the appropriate detergents. Wash out
the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
For wheels, door sills and lower areas of the vehicle use a different sponge.
Regular and thorough care helps to retain the value of your vehicle.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
The instructions for use on the packaging must be observed when using care
products. We recommend that you use ŠKODA Original Accessories care products.
Automatic Car Washes
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
(e.g. closing the windows and the tilt/slide roof etc.).
Care and Maintenance
137

If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts (e.g. spoiler, roof rack
system, aerial etc.) it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand.
Exterior vehicle care

After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the wiper blades should be
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then degreased.
Pressure Washers
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to instructions regarding the pressure and spraying distance from the vehicle surface.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
■ Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells there is a risk of injury from sharp metal parts!
Read and observe
Vehicle components
Paint
CAUTION
Washing the vehicle with high-pressure cleaners
■ Films should not be washed with any high-pressure cleaners - There is a risk
of damage.
■ Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing.
■ Hold a large spraying distance to the rear camera lens, to plastic parts (e.g.
Roof racks, spoilers, protective strips and the like), as well as soft materials
such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
■ The sensors of the parking aid can be sprayed only for a short time and there
must be a minimum distance of 10 cm - there is a risk of damage.
138 General Maintenance
Plastic parts
Chrome
and anodised
parts
Films
Windows
and external mirror glass
Head / tail lights
Reversing camera
Wheels
a)
Remedy
Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as
possible)
No water dropUse hard wax preserve (at least twice a
lets form on the
year), apply wax to clean and dry body
paint
Use polish, then wax (if the polish does
Paint has gone
not contain any preservative ingredimatt
ents)
Clear water, cloth / sponge, possibly
Soiling
cleaners provided for this purpose
clear water, cloth, if necessary, cleaners
Soiling
provided for this purpose, clean then
polish with a soft dry cloth
Soiling
Soft sponge and mild soap solutiona)
Soiling
Soiling
Soiling
Snow/ice
Door lock cylinders
Wipers / wiper
blades
on page 137 first.
Circumstances
Spilled fuel
■
CAUTION
■ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body
while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be no more than
60 °C max. - otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint.
■ Before driving through a car wash fold in the exterior mirrors - There is a risk
of damage.
■ For vehicles with roof antenna the antenna rod should be unscrewed before
driving through a car wash - there is a risk of damage.
and
Snow/ice
Wash with clean water and dry with a
wipe specifically for that purpose
Soft sponge and mild soap solutiona)
Wash with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth
Hand brush / de-icer
De-icing fluid specifically for that purpose
Soiling
Windscreen cleaner, sponge or cloth
Soiling
Clear water, then apply appropriate
substances
Mild soap solution = 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should
be lubricated with a suitable lubricant.

The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing device with a suitable grease whenever necessary.
Protection of cavities
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected by
a layer of long-lasting protective wax applied in the factory.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner.
Underbody
The underside of your vehicle is already protected at the factory for life against
chemical and mechanical influences.
We recommend having the protective coating — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of winter.
Product life of the films
Environmental influences (eg. Sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect
the life of the films. The ageing films and become brittle, which is normal,
there is no mistake.
The sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour.
When transporting a load on the roof rack (eg. Roof box u. Ä.), There is an increased risk of film damage (eg. By the rockfall from the fortified charge).
Rubber seals
■ Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any agents - the protective varnish coating could be damaged.
■ Windows and exterior mirror glass
■ Do not clean the insides of the windows/mirrors with sharp objects - There
is a risk of damage to the filaments or the antennae.
■ Do not use a cloth which has been used to polish the body - this could dirty
the window and impair visibility.
■ Head / tail lights
■ Do not wipe head/tail lights dry, do not use any sharp objects -There is a
risk of damage to the protective coating and cracks forming on the headlight
glass covers.
■ Reversing camera
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of
camera damage.
■ Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water.
■ To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet.
■ For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners.
■ Door lock cylinders
■ Make sure that at the car wash little water gets into the locking cylinder there is a risk that the lock cylinder freezes!
■ Wheels
■ Heavy soiling of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels - the result can be a vibration, which can cause premature wear of the steering.
■
CAUTION
Vehicle paint
■ Repair damaged areas as soon as possible.
■ Matt-painted parts should not be treated with polishes or hard waxes.
■ Do not polish in a dusty environment -There is a risk of paint scratches.
■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
■ Plastic parts
■ Do not use paint polish.
■ Chromed and anodized parts
■ Do not polish in a dusty environment -There is a risk of surface scratches.
■ Films
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of film
damage.
■ Do not use dirty cloths or sponges for cleaning.
■ Do not use a scraper or other means to remove ice and snow.
■ Do not polish the foils.
■ Do not use a high pressure cleaner on the films.
■
Care and Maintenance
139
Caring for the interior

Read and observe
Vehicle components
and
on page 137 first.
Circumstances
Dust, surface
soiling
Remedy
Vacuum cleaner
Water, slightly damp cotton / wool
cloth, if necessary, mild soap solutiona),
then wipe off with a soft cloth
Stubborn stains Cleaning fluid specifically for this task
Treat the leather periodically with a
Care (natural
leather protecting fluid / use a care
leather)
cream with light blocker and impregnation after each cleaning
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning
Care (Alcanglove”
tara® / material) Remove pills from materials with a
brush
Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge, if
Soiling
necessary, cleaners specifically for this
purpose
Wash with clean water and dry with a
Soiling
wipe specifically for that purpose
Soiling (fresh)
Natural leather /
Faux leather
Alcantara®
Fabric
Plastic parts
Windows
Covers on electriSoiling
cally heated seats
Seat belts »
Soiling
a)
Cleaners specifically for this purpose
soft cloth and mild soap solutiona)
Mild soap solution = 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
WARNING
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature inside the vehicle is high.
■
140 General Maintenance
CAUTION
Natural leather / faux leather / Alcantara® / material
■ Avoid standing for lengthy periods in bright sunlight, and protect the materials by covering to prevent them from fading.
■ Remove fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish and similar) as
soon as possible.
■ Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and
that no water gets into the seams - There is risk of damaging the leather!
■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush –There is a risk of damage to
the surface of the panelling.
■ Do not use leather cleaners, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar
agents on Alcantara® seat upholstery.
■ Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fastness - this could lead to clearly visible discolouration on the upholstery. This
is not a defect in the fabric.
■ Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can damage the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage will not be recognised
as a justified complaint.
■ Plastic parts
■ Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – There is a risk of
damage to the dash panel.
■ Windows
■ Do not attach any stickers to the heating filaments or glass antenna - there
is risk of damage.
■ Covers on electrically heated seats
■ Do not clean either with water or with other liquids - There is a risk of damage to the heating system.
■ Do not dry by switching on the heating.
■ Seat belts
■ After cleaning the belts, allow them to dry before retracting them.
■
Notice
During vehicle use, some minor changes may become visible on the leather
and Alcantara®(due to e.g. folds, discolouration).
Petrol and diesel refuelling
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel

Introduction
Fig. 154
Stickers showing the prescribed
fuel
Fig. 155 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Petrol and diesel refuelling
Unleaded petrol
Diesel fuel
141
142
142
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler
flap» fig. 154.
The fuel capacity for vehicles with front wheel drive is about 55 litres, and for
vehicles with all-wheel drive about 60 litres, with about 9 litres as reserve.
WARNING
Fuel and the fuel vapours are explosive - it can be fatal!
CAUTION
■ Never drive on a completely empty fuel tank! Irregular supply of fuel can
cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the exhaust system.
■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage.
■ If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country other than the one for
which it was intended, please talk to a ŠKODA Partner. They will tell you
whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in that country
and/or whether the manufacturer will sanction operating the vehicle with another fuel.
Read and observe
and
on page 141 first.
Perform the refuelling under the following conditions.
 The vehicle is unlocked.
 The ignition is switched off.
 The aux. heating and ventilation is switched off.
› Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow
1 and fold in the direction of
arrow 2 » fig. 155.
› Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 .
› Remove the tank cap and place on top of the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow 4 .
› Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go, and refuel.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time.
Do not continue refuelling.
› Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler tube and put it back in the
pump.
› Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direction to the arrow 3 until it securely engages.
› Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Inspecting and replenishing
141

Read and observe
Lower than 91 octane petrol should not be used, even in an emergency!
If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the engine or switch on the ignition.
■
■
Unleaded petrol
and
on page 141 first.
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler
flap» fig. 154 on page 141.
The vehicle can only operate with unleaded petrol that meets standard EN
2281), and contains maximum 10% bioethanol (E10).
Unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON/ROZ
We recommend using 95 ROZ petrol.
Optionally, the petrol 91 ,92 or. 93 ROZ can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased fuel consumption).
Specified petrol is unleaded, min. 95 RON / ROZ
Use min. 95 ROZ petrol.
In an emergency, 91. 92 or93 ROZ petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
slightly increased fuel consumption) » .
Prescribed petrol 98/(95) RON / ROZ
We recommend using petrol 98 ROZ.
Optionally, petrol 95 ROZ can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased
fuel consumption).
In an emergency, 91. 92 or93 ROZ petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
slightly increased fuel consumption)» .
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the engine and to the exhaust system.
■ When petrol with a lower than the prescribed octane is used, only continue
driving at mid-range engine speeds and with minimal strain on the engine. Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Petrol additions (additives)
■ Unleaded petrol complying with the EN 228 standard1 ) meets all the conditions for problem-free engine operation. We therefore do not recommend mixing fuel additives into the petrol - There is a risk of engine damage or damage
to the exhaust system.
■ The following additives may not be used - There is a risk of engine damage
or damage to the exhaust system!
■ Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with
manganese and iron content.
■ Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol).
Notice
Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
■ On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91, 92 or 93 ROZ, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 ROZ does not result in a noticeable power increase or a lower fuel consumption.
■ On vehicles using the prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 ROZ, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 ROZ can lead to an increase in
power and reduction in fuel consumption.
■
Diesel fuel

Read and observe
and
on page 141 first.
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler
flap» fig. 154 on page 141.
The vehicle can only be operated using diesel fuel that complies with the
standard EN 5902) and contains a maximum 7% biodiesel (B7)3).
1)
2)
3)
In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5
for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98.
In Germany DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590: 2004, in India
IS 1460 / Bharat IV or in an emergency IS 1460 / Bharat III.
In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590.
142 General Maintenance

Operating under different weather conditions
Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather conditions.
Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corresponds
to these conditions.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the engine and to the exhaust system.
■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above mentioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used do not start the engine or switch on the
ignition!
■ The biofuel RME must not be used!
CAUTION
Diesel fuel additives
■ The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meet all the conditions for a trouble free running engine. Therefore, we recommend that you
do not add any fuel additives to the diesel - - there is a risk of engine damage
or damage to the exhaust system.
AdBlue® and its refilling

143
144
In order to reduce pollutant emissions from vehicles with diesel engines and
the SCR catalyst, a urea (AdBlue®) solution is injected into the exhaust system.
Only use AdBlue® that corresponds to the standard ISO 22241-1. Do not add
additives to AdBlue®.
The AdBlue® consumption is approx. 1.2- 1.6 l/1000 km and depends on driving
style, the operating temperature of the system and on the weather conditions.
The
filling level is about 8.5 litres.
Notice
The AdBlue®Solution freezes at a temperature of -11 ° C and lower. The system has a heater in order to ensure operability at low temperatures.
■ We recommend purchasing AdBlue® refill bottles from the ŠKODA original
parts
■ The working life of the solution AdBlue® is 4 years. After this time the solution is to be renewed in a specialist garage.
■ AdBlue® is a registered trademark of the VDA. AdBlue® is also known as AUS
32 (Aqueous Urea Solution) Or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) famous.
■

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
AdBlue®-tank
CAUTION
AdBlue® attacks the surface of some materials (e.g. as painted parts, plastics,
fabrics). Clean the areas affected with AdBlue® using a damp cloth and plenty
of cold water. Remove any dried AdBlue® with warm water and a sponge.
Check level
Introduction
Check level
AdBlue® refilling
WARNING
AdBlue® can cause skin, eye and respiratory irritation. If your eyes or skin
come into contact with the AdBlue® fluid, immediately wash the affected
area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. Seek medical assistance if
required.
Read and observe
and
on page 143 first.
The filler neck of the AdBlue®Tank is located in the luggage compartment under the symbol  and the cap marked with the lettering “AdBlue®” » fig. 156 on
page 144.
The AdBlue® level is automatically monitored.
If the available travel distance that can be completed with the remaining AdBlue® tank capacity drops to about 2400 km, the warning  appears on the instrument cluster and a request for replenishment of AdBlue® appears.
An indication also appears in the instrument cluster showing the maximum
and minimum AdBlue® tank capacity.
If the available travel distance that can be driven with the existing AdBlue®
tank capacity drops down to 0 km, then no motor start is possible.
The distance which can still be driven with the remaining AdBlue®, can be determined using the travel data» page 32.
Inspecting and replenishing
143
Refilling
AdBlue® refilling
› Fold up the flooring in the luggage compartment in the arrow direction
Fig. 156 Raise flooring / remove box / cover lid
1
» fig. 156.
› Remove the box for the vehicle tool in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Open the filler cap in the direction of the arrow 3 » fig. 157.
› Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 4 .
› Fill the AdBlue® through the filler A according to the instructions on the refill bottle.
› After filling AdBlue® put the tank cap on the fuel filler neck and turn in the
opposite direction of the arrow 4 until it reaches the stop.
› Close the filler cap in the opposite direction to the arrow 3 .
› Store the box for the vehicle tools in the same place.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
Before continuing your journey, switch on just the ignition for 30 s so that the
refilling can be recognized by the system. Only then start the engine.
Engine compartment

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fig. 157 Open the cover lid / rotate the fuel filler cap / filler neck

Read and observe
and
on page 143 first.
We recommend AdBlue® to be refilled by a specialised workshop. It can refill
itself using a refill bottle if necessary.
We recommend when refilling using refill bottles, that you use refill bottles
from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
When adding AdBlue® take note of the minimum and maximum AdBlue® tank
capacity shown in the display of the instrument cluster » page 32.
Refill AdBlue® under the following conditions.
 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
 The ignition is switched off.
144 General Maintenance
Opening and closing the bonnet
Engine compartment overview
Windscreen washer fluid
145
146
146
WARNING
Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a blanket) – risk of fire!
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must
be observed - otherwise there is a risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area!
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
■ Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY
system, open the driver's door.

WARNING (Continued)
Firmly apply the handbrake.
For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
On vehicles with automatic transmission place the selector lever in the P
position.
■ Allow the engine to cool.
■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the
engine compartment – There is a risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or
coolant has stopped escaping.
Opening and closing the bonnet
■
■
WARNING
Information for working in the engine room
■ Keep everyone away from the engine compartment.
■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
■ Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may still turn on suddenly
about 10 minutes after switching off the ignition!
■ Do not smoke in the vicinity of the engine and avoid the use of open
flames or sparks.
■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment.
There is a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
■ Read the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine running
■ If it is necessary to work on the engine with the engine running, beware
of rotating engine parts and electrical equipment - There is a risk to life!
■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
CAUTION
Only refill using fluids with the proper specification - There is risk of damage to
the vehicle!
Notice
Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
■ We recommend you have the operating fluids replaced by a specialist garage.
■
Fig. 158 Opening the bonnet

Read and observe
and
on page 144 first.
Open bonnet
› Ensure that the windscreen wipers are not raised away from the windscreen
- There is risk of damage to the bonnet.
› Open the front door and pull the release lever below the dash panel in the
direction of arrow 1 » fig. 158.
› Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 and the bonnet is unlocked.
› Raise the bonnet in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Remove the bonnet support in the direction of arrow 4 from the holder.
› Secure the open bonnet by putting the end of the supports in the opening in
the direction of the arrow 5 .
Closing the bonnet
› Lift the bonnet
› Take out the bonnet support from the holder designed to hold it.
› Drop down the bonnet lid from a height of about 20 cm applying light pressure until it clicks safely into place.
WARNING
Never drive with the bonnet lid not properly closed - There is a risk of an
accident!
■ Make sure that when you close the bonnet no body parts are squeezed there is danger of injury!
■
Inspecting and replenishing
145

Engine compartment overview
Read and observe
and
on page 144 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir A is located in the engine compartment » fig. 160.
The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5.5 litres on vehicles that
have a headlight cleaning system1).
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid for the current or expected weather
conditions. We recommend that you use windscreen washer fluid from ŠKODA
Original Accessories.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight cleaning system, then only use
windscreen washer fluid types that do not attack the polycarbonate coating of
the headlights - otherwise there is a risk of damage to headlights.
■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when replenishing it with liquid - otherwise the liquid transportation system might be
contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction.
■
Fig. 159 Arrangement (example) in the engine compartment

Read and observe
and
on page 144 first.
148
146
147
147
149
149
Coolant expansion reservoir
B Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
C Engine oil dipstick
D Engine oil filler opening
E Brake fluid reservoir
F Vehicle battery
A
Engine oil

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Specification
Check and refill
147
147
The engine has been filled ex-factory with a high-grade oil that can be used
throughout the year (except in extreme climate zones).
Windscreen washer fluid
Fig. 160
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
We recommend that the oil changes be carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
The engine oil should be changed after specified service intervals» page 135.
The engine uses up some oil, depending on driving style and operating conditions (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may also be higher than this during
the first 5,000 kilometres.
1)
In some countries, 5.5 litres applies for both variants.
146 General Maintenance

WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 144.
CAUTION
Do not add any additives to the engine oil - There is a risk of engine damage.
Notice
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Specification

Read and observe
and
on page 147 first.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated separately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
Models with fixed service intervals
Diesel engines
2.0 l/81, 103 kW TDI CR
Specification
VW 507 00
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF.
CAUTION
If no prescribed engine oil is available, then max. 0.5 l oil of the specifications
ACEA C3 or API CJ-4 can be refilled.
Check and refill

Read and observe
and
on page 147 first.
Check and refill oil under the following conditions.
 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
 The engine operating temperature is reached.
 The engine is off.
Check the status
› Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
› Pull the dipstick out and wipe with a clean cloth.
› Push the dipstick back to the stop and then pull it out again.
› Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in.
The oil level must be in range A » fig. 161. If the oil level is below range A , oil
must be refilled.
Refilling
› Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening D » fig. 159 on page 146.
› Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct specifications » page 147.
› Check the oil level.
› Screw on carefully the lid of the engine oil filler.
CAUTION
The oil level must never be below range A » fig. 161there is a risk of damage
to the engine as well as to the exhaust system.
■ If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range A , stop
driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■
Notice
An engine oil level which is too low is shown in the instrument cluster by the
warning light illuminating and also indicated by the message» page 35. Nevertheless, we recommend checking the oil level on a regular basis using the
dipstick.
Coolant

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fig. 161 Dipstick variants
Checking and refilling
148 
Inspecting and replenishing
147
The coolant helps to keep the engine temperature down, and consists of water and coolant additive (with additives that protect the cooling system against
corrosion and prevent furring).
The proportion of coolant additive in the coolant must be 40 to 60 %.
The correct mix of water and coolant additive should be checked and if necessary corrected by a specialist garage.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 144.
■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurised -There is a risk of
scalding or injury from splashes of coolant!
■ To protect against the coolant splashing, cover the cap with a cloth when
opening.
■ Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant. If
the coolant comes into contact with the eye or skin, wash the affected area
with plenty of water for several minutes, and where appropriate seek medical help.
■
CAUTION
Do not cover the radiator and install any parts (e.g auxiliary lights.) in front of
the air intakes - There is a risk of the engine overheating.
Fig. 162
Coolant expansion reservoir
Read and observe
and
on page 148 first.
Check and refill coolant under the following conditions.
 The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
 The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm the result of the check may
be wrong).
 The engine is turned off.
Check the coolant level - the coolant level must be between the marks A and
B » fig. 162. If the coolant level is below the mark B , refill with coolant.
Refilling
The reservoir must always contain a small amount of coolant »
.
› Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir and unscrew
the cap carefully.
› Always top up using coolant of the correct specification.
› Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The specification for the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reservoir
» fig. 162.
If the specified coolant is not available, then refilling only with distilled or purified water, and get a specialist garage to correct the water-coolant additive
mix as soon as possible.
CAUTION
With an empty expansion tank top up coolant. The system could aerate There is a risk of engine damage!  Stop driving! Switch off the engine and
seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » fig. 162. The coolant could, when
heated, be expelled from the cooling system - There is a risk of damage to the
engine parts.
■ If it is not possible to add coolant,stop driving! Switch off the engine and
seek assistance from a specialist garage.
■ A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification can
reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system -There is a risk of damage to the cooling system and the engine.
■ If distilled (purified) water has been used to top up, the coolant should be replaced by a specialist garage - There is a risk of engine damage.
■ A loss of coolant indicates leaks in the cooling system -There is a risk of engine damage. Top up with coolant and then seek assistance from a specialist

garage.
■
Checking and refilling
148 General Maintenance

Notice
A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light and shown by the relevant message » page 34. We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
Brake fluid
Vehicle battery

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
150
Check condition
Fig. 163
Brake fluid reservoir
Charging
151
Disconnect/reconnect and change
151
The vehicle battery provides a power source to start the engine and for the
supply of electrical components in the vehicle.
Check the brake fluid under the following conditions.
 The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface.
 The engine is turned off.
Check brake fluid level - The brake fluid level must lie between the markings
“MIN” and “MAX”» fig. 163.
Specification - The brake fluid must comply with the standard VW 501 14 (this
standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4).
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 144.
■ If the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below
the “MIN” » fig. 163mark, this may be an indication of a leak in the brake
system.  Do not continue driving - There is a risk of an accident! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
■
Notice
■ The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service.
■ A low brake fluid level which is too low is indicated by the warning light
being shown on the display of the instrument cluster as well as the corresponding message» page 34. We still recommend inspecting the brake fluid
level in the reservoir from time to time.
Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge protection
The on-board power supply system tries to prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging in the following ways when it is subject to heavy loading.
▶ By increasing the engine idle speed.
▶ Through the power limitation of certain loads.
▶ By switching off some loads(heated seats, heated rear window) for as long
as necessary.
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol
Meaning





Always wear eye protection!
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye protection!
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery!
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced!
Keep children away from the vehicle battery!
WARNING
Battery acid is highly corrosive - There is a risk of injury, chemical burns or
poisoning! Corrosive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory
tract and the eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
Inspecting and replenishing
149

WARNING (Continued)
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. Get
medical assistance without delay.
■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely independent (e.g. children).
■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings.
Check condition
■
WARNING
Working on the car battery may cause an explosion, fire, injury or chemical
burn! The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Do not smoke, use open flames or light or transmitting devices.
■ A discharged vehicle battery may freeze slightly. Never charge up a frozen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery.
■ Do not connect the battery terminals, bridging the two poles will cause a
short circuit.
CAUTION
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork –
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Notice
■ We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a specialist garage.
■ You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
Fig. 164 Vehicle battery: Open the cover / acid level indicator

Read and observe
and
on page 149 first.
The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the
inspection service.
Check the acid level
For car batteries with acid level indicator, acidity can be checked on the basis
of a colour display. In vehicle batteries with the label “AGM” there is no acid
level examination.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle battery may be provided with a cover, this can be opened in the direction of arrow» fig. 164 - .
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. Therefore, carefully knock
on the display before the check» fig. 164 - .
Black colour – electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour – electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Battery discharge
If frequent short journeys are made, the vehicle battery does not recharge sufficiently.
The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures.
If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, then disconnect the
negative terminal of the battery or charge the battery constantly with a very
low charging current.
150 General Maintenance
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following functions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
Charging

Read and observe
and
on page 149 first.
Only charge the battery when the ignition and all consumers are switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
› For vehicles withthe START-STOPsystem or aux. heater , connect the -terminal of the charger on the battery’s -pole, the -terminal of the charger
to the ground point of the engine » page 163.
› For vehicleswithout the START-STOPsystem or aux. heating, connect the
charger terminals to the corresponding battery poles ( to, to).
› Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
› After charging has been successful: First switch off the charger and remove
the mains cable from the power socket.
› Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or lower) must be used until full charging is achieved.
Function / equipment
Operating measure
Electric windows
Panorama sliding/tilting roof
Sunblind
Time settings
» page 58
» page 59
» page 60
» page 41
CAUTION
Disconnect the battery only with the ignition and consumers turned off There is a risk of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.
■ Before disconnecting the battery, always close the electric windows and the
tilt/slide sunroof - otherwise the electrics for these may malfunction.
■ Under no circumstances mix up the charging cables – There is a risk of fire.
■
Notice
After disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery, we recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality of
the vehicle is guaranteed.
WARNING
When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released -There is a risk
of an explosion. An explosion can be caused due to sparks while unclamping or loosening the cable plug.
■ So-called“quick-charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge. Therefore, have“Quick
loading” carried out by a specialist garage.
■
Disconnect/reconnect and change

Read and observe
and
on page 149 first.
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and the
same size as the original Battery.
We recommend you have the batteryreplaced by a specialist garage.
› To disconnect, switch off the ignition and disconnect the negative terminal
first , then disconnect the positive terminal.
› When reconnecting the battery, reconnect the positive terminal first, then
connect the negative terminal .
Inspecting and replenishing
151
Fitting new tyres
Only fit approved radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and
the same tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
Wheels
Wheels and tyres

When mounting new tyres, they have to be replaced axle by axle.
Introduction
Unidirectional tyres
The rotating direction of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Advice on tyre/wheel usage
Tyre pressure
Tyre wear and wheel change
Spare wheel
Tyre marking
152
153
153
154
154
The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the following tyre characteristics may be degraded.
▶ Driving stability.
▶ Traction.
▶ Tyre noise and tyre wear.
WARNING
Never use tyres if you do not know anything about their condition and
age - There is a risk of accidents.
■ Never drive with damaged tyres – there is the risk of an accident.
Advice on tyre/wheel usage
■
During the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip; appropriate care
should therefore be taken when driving.
Tyres with the deeper profiles should always be fitted to the front wheels.
Rims and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We recommend that you use rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheels and tyres should always be stored in a cool, dry and dark place. The
tyres themselves should be stored vertically.
Tyre life
Tyres age losing their original characteristics, even if they are not used. We
recommend that you do not use tyres that are more than 6 years old.
The manufacturing date is specified on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the inside). For example, DOT ... 10 16... means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 10. week of 2016.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges etc.) on a regular basis.
Remove any foreign objects in the tyre’s profile immediately (e.g. small stones).
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed and help should be sought from a specialist workshop.
152
General Maintenance
CAUTION
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances (e.g. oil, grease
and fuel) which could damage them. If the tyres with these substances come
into contact, then we recommend that you check this in a specialist workshop.
■ Do not use rims with ground or polished surfaces in winter conditions - there
is a risk of rim damage (e.g through salt spreading).
■
Notice
We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a specialist workshop.
■ We recommend that you use tyres, snow chains and full wheel trims from
ŠKODA Original Accessories.
■
Tyre pressure
WARNING
Do not drive with incorrect tyre pressure, there is a risk of an accident.
In the event of very rapid pressure loss (e.g. in the event of tyre damage)
an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop without
sudden steering movements and without any hard braking -There is a risk
of accident.
■
■
Notice
The declaration of conformity (the so-called COC document), can be obtained
from a ŠKODA1) partner.
Fig. 165 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
tyres
Tyre wear and wheel change
The prescribed tyre inflation is on the sticker with pictograms A » fig. 165 (for
some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
Tyre pressure should always correspond with the load.
B Inflation pressure for half load
C Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower
fuel consumption and emissions)
D Inflation pressure for full load
E Tyre diameter in inches
This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre pressure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in the
vehicle's technical documentation, in the declaration of conformity (in the
so-called COC document) and listed on the vehicle data » page 177.
F Tyre pressure value on the front axle
G Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
Check tyre pressures
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a
month and also before setting off on a long journey.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
higher pressure of warm tyres.
Fig. 166 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change
Tyre wear increases in the following circumstances.
▶ Incorrect tyre pressures.
▶ Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / braking).
▶ Incorrect wheel balancing (you should have the wheels balanced after
changing/repair tyres or if the steering “is drifting”).
▶ Wheel alignment errors.
There are wear indicator markersin the tyre profiles, indicating whether the
minimum permissible tread depth has been reached» fig. 166 - . A tyre
should be regarded as worn out when this indicator is flush with the tread.
Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI” and/or other symbols (e.g. ), identify the position of the wear indicators.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
each time the pressures are changed » page 126.
1)
Only valid for some countries and some models.
Wheels
153

To ensure uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the
wheels every 10 000 km, in line with the schedule» fig. 166 - .
WARNING
■ Change the tyres at the latest when they are worn down to the wear indicators - There is a risk of an accident.
■ Faulty wheel alignment affects handling - There is a risk of an accident.
■ Unusual vibrations or the vehicle“pulling” to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If there are no external signs of tyre
damage, seek the help of a specialist workshop.
Spare wheel
Only use this emergency spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist workshop, as it is not intended for permanent use.
A warning label is always placed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel.
Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel.
▶ Do not cover the warning sign.
▶ Be specially attentive when driving.
▶ Inflate the emergency spare to the maximum inflation pressure for the vehicle » page 153.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the
system » page 126.
WARNING
Never drive with more than one spare wheel mounted!
Avoid full throttle acceleration, sharp braking and fast cornering when
driving with the temporary spare wheel.
■ Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel.
■ Observe instructions on the warning sign of the emergency wheel.
■
■
Tyre marking
Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 225/50 R 17 91 T
225
50
R
17
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Code letter for the type of tyre - Radial
Diameter of wheel in inches
154 General Maintenance
91
Load index
T
Speed symbol
Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre
Load index
Load
(In kg)
90
91
92
93
94
95
97
600
615
630
650
670
690
730
Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fitted
with tyres in a given category
Speed
symbol
Maximum
speed
(In km/h)
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
180
190
200
210
240
270
300
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed
for the tyres fitted – There is a risk of an accident.
Operating in winter conditions
All-year (or “winter”) tyres
All-year or “winter”tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snowflake
symbol ) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter conditions.
To get the best possible driving characteristics, all-year or “winter”tyres, with a
minimum tread depth of 4 mm on all four wheels, should be fitted.
If “winter” tyres are mounted, summer tyres should be fitted again in good
time as they provide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance,
less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice
as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.
Speed symbol
All-year or “winter”tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol ) of
a lower speed category than listed in the vehicle’s technical documentation
can be used provided that the maximum permissible speed for these tyres is

not exceeded even if the maximum possible speed of the vehicle is higher.
The speed limit for all-season or “winter”Tires can be adjusted in MAXI
DOTDisplay in the menu item Winter tyres » page 45.
If the vehicle has all-season or “winter”tires of a lower speed category then
the specified maximum speed of the vehicle (referring to tyres that have not
been delivered by the factory, a warning label with the maximum value of the
speed category provided for the mounted tyres must be fixed in the interior of
the vehicle in a constantly visible place in the driver’s field of vision. The warning label (sticker) can be replaced by setting maximum value of the mounted
tire speed rating in the MAXI DOTDisplay in theWinter tyresmenu item1). This
specification defines the maximum vehicle speed with mounted all-season or
“winter”tyres that may not be exceeded.
Snow chains
The snow chains improve handling in wintry road conditions.
Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains » page 158.
Rim size
Depth (D)
Tyre size
6J x 16
7J x 16
50 mm
45 mm
205/55 R16
205/55 R16
6J x 17
45 mm
205/50 R17
It is only permissible to fit snow chains on the front wheels with the following
wheel/tyre combinations.
Rim size
Depth (D)
Tyre size
7J x 16
7J x 17
45 mm
45 mm
215/60 R16
225/50 R17
WARNING
Do not use chains on snow and ice-free routes - the handling would be impaired and there is a risk of damage to the tyres.
Only use snow chains with links and locks which are not larger than 12 mm.
The use of snow chains on vehicles with front-wheel drive and on vehicles
with four-wheel drive differs.
front-wheel drive
Snow chains must only be fitted on the front wheels and are applicable only to
the following wheel / tyre combinations.
Rim size
Depth (D)
Tyre size
6J x 16
7J x 16
6J x 17
50 mm
45 mm
45 mm
205/55 R16
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
All-wheel drive
The snow chains can be fitted to the wheels on the front or rear axle.
It is only permissible to fit snow chains on the front wheels with the following
wheel/tyre combinations.
1)
Valid in certain countries.
Wheels
155
WARNING
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle, or there is a risk of
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Emergency equipment

Location of reflective vest
Introduction
Fig. 168
Storage compartment for the reflective vest
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle
Location of reflective vest
fire extinguisher
Vehicle tool kit
156
156
156
157
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle
The reflective vest can be stowed in a bracket below the driver's seat
» fig. 168.
fire extinguisher
Fig. 169
Release the fire extinguisher
Fig. 167 Placing of the first-aid kit and the warning triangle
The following information is for the first aid kit and warning triangle from the
ŠKODA Original accessories valid.
Placing the first-aid kit
The first-aid box is attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the luggage
compartment » fig. 167 - .
Placing of the warning triangle
The warning triangle can be attached to the recess under the loading edge using straps» fig. 167.
The warning triangle, which is included in the equipment with the spare wheel,
can be stowed in a removable box on the right next to the spare wheel
» page 94.
156 Do-it-yourself
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driver's seat.
› To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two belts
in the direction of arrow» fig. 169and remove the fire extinguisher.
› To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the
belts.
The Owner's Manual is attached to the fire extinguisher.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date,
the correct function of the device is not guaranteed.

WARNING
Always properly secure the fire extinguisher, there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Vehicle tool kit
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with it –
there is a risk of injury.
■ Always securely stow the tool in the box and make sure that it is secured
to the spare wheel using the tape - there is a risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
■
CAUTION
Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box There is a risk of damage to the box.
Notice
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
Fig. 170 Vehicle tool kit
The box containing the vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage compartment
for the spare wheel, and can be secured with a tape depending on the equipment fitted.
Depending on the equipment, not all of the following components in the onboard tool kit have to be contained in it.
1 Screwdriver
2 Key for removing and installing the tail light
3 Top section for the anti-theft wheel bolts
4 Towing eyelet
5 Clamps for removing the wheel trims
6 Jack with sign
7 Wheel wrench
8 Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps
9 Breakdown kit
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
changing a wheel on the road.
› Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
with a flat and firm surface.
› Switch off the engine.
› For vehicles with amanual gearbox select 1. gear.
› On vehicles with anautomatic gearbox place the selector lever in the P position.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
prescribed distance.
› Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road while the wheel is being changed (they should remain behind a crash
barrier, for instance).
› Uncouple any trailers.
Changing a wheel
› Remove the spare wheel » page 158.
› Remove the full wheel trim » page 158 or caps » page 159.
› Loosen the wheel bolts » page 160 » .
Emergency equipment, and self-help

157
› Jack up the vehicle» page 160 until the wheel that needs changing is clear of
the ground.
› Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
› Remove the wheel carefully.
› Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
› Lower the vehicle.
› Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“pulling crossways”)» page 160.
› Replace the wheel trim» page 158and caps» page 159.
WARNING
Tightening torque which is too high can damage the threads and this can
result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim. Where
tightening torque is too low, the wheels may become loose while driving There is a risk of accident. Therefore drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked.
Removing /stowing the spare wheel
Fig. 171
Remove the wheel
When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct » page 152.
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If screws are corroded and difficult to move, these must be replaced.
WARNING
Undo the wheel bolts slightly (about one turn), provided the vehicle has
not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could come loose and fall off
– There is a risk of an injury.
■ Under no circumstances must the bolts be greased or oiled - There is a
risk of an accident.
■
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage
compartment and is fixed in place with a fastening screw.
Remove the wheel
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, the following work should be carried out.
› Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment.
› Unscrew the locking screw in the direction of arrow » fig. 171 and the remove
the wheel.
› Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage
› Remove the box with the vehicle tools.
› Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.
› Check tyre pressure on the mounted wheel and adjust if necessary and, with
› Store the box for the vehicle tools in the same place again.
› Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing upwards.
› Screw the locking screw against the direction of arrow until it stops » fig. 171.
› Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
compartment and secure with a locking screw.
vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the
system » page 126.
› Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible.
The prescribed tightening torque is 120 Nm.
Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair options.
Store wheel away
Full wheel trim
Removing trim
› Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims on the edge of the full
wheel trim.
› Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
158 Do-it-yourself

Installing trim
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
› Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 173
Anti-theft wheel bolt and attachment
The position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is indicated by means of a symbol on
the back of the wheel trim supplied ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories. If you are using the anti-theft wheel bolt it should be fitted at this
point » .
WARNING
If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order
to cool the brake system, or there is a risk of an accident.
CAUTION
■ If the wheel trim is positioned outside the position marked for the anti-theft
wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel cover.
■ Only use manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – there is a risk
of damaging the trim.
Notice
We recommend using wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheel bolts
Fig. 172
Remove the cap
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect wheels from being stolen. This can only be
B .with the attachment» fig. 173 loosened / tightened.
› Insert the attachment
B » fig. 173as far as it will go on the anti-theft wheel
bolt A .
› Insert the key as far as it will go onto attachment B and loosen / tighten the
wheel bolt.
› Remove the attachment.
The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle in case of a possible wheel change.
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
the wheel trim» page 158.
Notice
The attachment and the anti-theft wheel bolts are provided with a code number. A replacement attachment can be ordered from ŠKODA Genuine Accessories using this.
› To remove the cap insert the extraction pliers as far as they will go on the
cap and full them out in the direction of the arrow » fig. 172.
› To install, insert the cap onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go.
Emergency equipment, and self-help
159
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 174
Loosening the wheel bolts
Fig. 176 Attach lifting jack
› Insert the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated
attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts » fig. 173 on page 159.
› To loosen the screws,grasp the key end and turn the screw about one turn
rotation in the direction of the arrow» fig. 174.
› Totighten the screwsgrasp the key end and turn the screw about against
the direction of the arrow» fig. 174until it is tight.
WARNING
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
make sure you keep your footing - There is a risk of injury.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 175
Jacking points for the jack
160 Do-it-yourself
Before the vehicle is raised, please take note of the safety instructions »
.
To lift the vehicle, us the jack from the tool kit. Position the car jack at the
jacking point closest to the flat tyre.
The runner connectors for the jack are located directly below the marking on
the lower sill of the vehicle » fig. 175.
› Position the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
and ensure that the jack will fit in the jacking point when raised» fig. 176 - .
› Use the crank to raise the jack until its pawl covers the jacking
point» fig. 176- .
› Raise the vehicle until the wheel is slightly off the floor.
WARNING
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of injury.
■ Ensure the vehicle cannot unexpectedly roll away.
■ Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip.
■ Place a wide and stable base material under the jack if on a loose surfaces (e.g. gravel).
■ Place an anti-slip base material (e.g. a rubber mat) under the jack if on a
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
■ Never position any body parts (e.g. arms or legs) under the vehicle while
the vehicle is raised.
■ Never start the engine if the vehicle is raised.

CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly positioned against the bar of
the lower beam - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Description of the breakdown kit
Breakdown kit

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Description of the breakdown kit
Preparing to use the puncture repair kit
Sealing and inflating tyres
Information on driving with repaired tyres
161
162
162
162
The following information applies for the breakdown kit supplied ex-factory.
The breakdown kit can be used to seal punctures with a diameter of up to
about 4 mm.
Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all intended to replace a
permanent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist
garage.
Replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit as soon as possible, or consult a specialist garage about repair options.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails).
Do not use the breakdown kit in the following cases.
▶ The rim is damaged.
▶ The outside temperature is below -20 ° C.
▶ Tyre punctures greater than 4 mm.
▶ Damage to the tyre wall.
▶ The use-by date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
WARNING
If there is skin contact with the sealant wash the affected area immediately.
■ Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit.
■
Fig. 177 Description of the breakdown kit

Read and observe
on page 161 first.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Valve remover
Inflation hose with plug
12 volt cable connector
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
Screw for tyre pressure reduction
Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on
the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle)
Tyre inflation hose
ON and OFF switch
Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve core
Notice
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.
Emergency equipment, and self-help
161
Preparing to use the puncture repair kit

Read and observe
on page 161 first.
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
undertaking a wheel repair on a road.
› Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
with a flat and firm surface.
› Switch off the engine.
› For vehicles with a manual gearbox select 1. gear.
› On vehicles with an automatic gearbox place the selector lever in the P position.
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
prescribed distance.
› Have all the occupants get out. While the repair is being carried out, the passengers should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a
crash barrier, for instance).
› Uncouple any trailers.
Sealing and inflating tyres

Read and observe
on page 161 first.
Sealing
› Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.
› Insert the valve remover 2 » fig. 177 on page 161on the valve insert, so that
the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover.
› Unscrew the valve insert and place it on a clean base (rag, paper etc.).
› Forcefully shake bottle 10 » fig. 177 on page 161several times.
› Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflater bottle 10 . The film on
the bottle cap is pierced.
› Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and insert the bottle onto the
tyre valve.
› Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill the entire sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
› Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve.
› Screw in the valve insert with the valve remover 2 .
Inflating
› Screw the tyre inflation hose 8 » fig. 177 on page 161firmly onto the tyre
valve.
162 Do-it-yourself
› For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
› Check that the screw for the tire pressure reduction 6 is closed.
› Start the engine.
› Plug the connector 4 into 12 volt socket » page 82.
› Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 9 .
› Once tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar has been reached, turn off the air
compressor. Maximum run time of 6 minutes »
.
› If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
hose 8 from the tyre valve.
› Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent
to “distribute” in the tyre.
› Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose
8 back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
› Stick the corresponding label 1 » fig. 177 on page 161 onto the dashboard in
the driver's line of vision.
At a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0–2.5 bar, the journey can be continued at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph.
WARNING
If the tire does not inflate at least. 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre.  Do not drive the vehicle.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is being inflated – there is a risk of burns.
■
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor if it has been running for as much as 6 minutes –
There is a risk of damage to the compressor! Allow the air compressor to cool a
few minutes before switching it on again.
Information on driving with repaired tyres

Read and observe
on page 161 first.
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre is to be checked after a 10-minute
check drive.
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less
› The tyre cannot be properly sealed with the breakdown kit.  Stop driving!
Seek help from a specialist garage.

If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more
› Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 153.
› Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
tyre. The following guidelines must be observed.
■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
Jump-starting

Fig. 178 Jump-starting:  - Discharged battery,  - power-supplying battery / ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
163
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 144.
■ When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be observed » page 149.
■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the battery of another vehicle –There is a risk of explosion and injury!
■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low
– There is a risk of explosion and caustic burns!
■
Read and observe
on page 163 first.
If, because of a discharged battery, it is not possible to start the engine, the
battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. To do this, jumpstart cables are required which have a sufficiently large cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the
power-supplying battery must not be significantly lower than the capacity of
the discharged battery.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
› Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
› Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the power-supplying battery.
› Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the power-supplying battery.
› For vehicles with the START-STOP system, secure the clamp 4 to the
ground point of the engine A » fig. 178.
› For vehicles without the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp 4 to a solid
metal part firmly attached to the engine block or directly to the engine block.
Starting engine
› Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
› Initiate the starting process in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
› If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure
and repeat after half a minute.
› Disconnect the jumper cables in reverse order to connecting.
Emergency equipment, and self-help
163

WARNING
Never clamp the jump cable to the negative terminal of the discharged
battery - There is a risk of an explosion.
■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – risk of short circuit!
■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle
– risk of short circuit!
■ Position the jump cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts
in the engine compartment - There is a risk of injuries and the risk of vehicle damage.
■
Towing the vehicle
Information about the towing process
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer
if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km.


Driver of the tow vehicle
› On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting.
› On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care.
› Do not drive off until the tow rope is taught.
Driver of the towed vehicle
› If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. The brake
booster and power steering only operate if the engine is running, otherwise
much greater force has to be applied to the brake pedal and more power has
to be expended for steering.
› If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the
steering wheel does not lock and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used.
› Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
› Keep the tow rope taut at all times during the towing procedure.
WARNING
Spiral tow ropes must not be used for towing » fig. 179- , the towing
eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - There is a risk of an accident.
■ The tow rope should not be twisted - there is the risk of an accident.
■
Fig. 179 Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope
For towing using a tow rope, use only a braided synthetic fibre rope » fig. 179 » .
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes at the front
» page 165, towing eyes at the rear » page 165 or to the towing device of
the trailer device » page 127.
Conditions for towing.
 Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels
raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage!
 If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle
raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer.
164 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Do not tow-start the engine – There is a risk of damaging the engine. The
battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 163, Jumpstarting.
■ For off-road towing manoeuvres, there is a risk to both vehicles that the fasteners may become overloaded and damaged.
■
Notice
We recommend that you use a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Front towing eye
Towing eye rear
Fig. 180 Remove cap / install towing eye
Fig. 181 Remove cap / install towing eye
Cap removal/fitting
› To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow 1 and remove it
in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 180.
› To fit it, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite
edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Cap removal/fitting
› To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow
1 and remove it
in the direction of arrow 2 » fig. 181.
› To fit it, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite
edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
› To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow 3
» fig. 180 until the stop» .
Removing/installing the towing eye
› To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow 3
» fig. 181 until the stop» .
For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel
wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed
through the eye.
For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel
wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed
through the eye.
› To removeit, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow
› To removeit, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow
3.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye
could break whilst being towed.
3.
Vehicles with a trailer device
For vehicles with factory-fitted towing device, at the back there is no mount
for a screw-in towing eye. Use the detachable ball rod for towing » page 127,
Towing device.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye
could break whilst being towed.
Emergency equipment, and self-help
165
› Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow
2 and install a new
battery.
› Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks into place.
Remote control and removable light - replacing the
battery/batteries

Introduction
Remote control of the auxiliary heating
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Key with fold-out key bit
Remote control of the auxiliary heating
Removable light
Fig. 183
Radio remote control: Battery
cover
166
166
166
CAUTION
The replacement battery/batteries must comply with the original specification.
■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batteries.
■
Notice
■ We recommend having the faulty battery/batteries replaced by a specialist
garage.
■ If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the battery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner.
Key with fold-out key bit

Read and observe
on page 166 first.
› Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover» fig. 183.
› Turn the cover against the direction of the arrow up to the mark A
to open
the cover.
› Replace the battery and refit the battery cover.
› Turn the cover in the marked direction of the arrow up to the mark B to
open the cover.
Removable light
Fig. 184
Locking clip on the battery cover
Fig. 182 Remove cover/take out battery

Read and observe
on page 166 first.
› Pop out the key bit.
› Press off the battery cover
A » fig. 182 with your thumb or by using a screw-
driver in the area of arrow 1 .
166 Do-it-yourself

Read and observe
on page 166 first.
› Take out the light in the direction of arrow » fig. 184.

› Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
object from the area of the lock clips A .
› Replace the batteries.
› Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it
clicks into place.
CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency locking/unlocking.
Locking the door without locking cylinders
CAUTION
If an incorrect battery type is used or a non-rechargeable battery, there is a
risk of damaging the light and the vehicle's electrical system.
Emergency unlocking / locking of doors

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
167
167
167
168
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Locking the door without locking cylinders
Unlock the luggage compartment lid
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Fig. 186 Emergency locking: Rear door left/right
› Open the corresponding back door and remove the trim A » fig. 186.
› Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (sprung position).
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
› Replace the cover
Fig. 185
Handle on the driver's door:
Open lock cover
A.
After closing, the door is locked.
Unlock the luggage compartment lid
Fig. 187
Unlatch lid
The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the
key via the lock cylinder.
› Pull on the door handle and hold in place.
› Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
cover in the direction of arrow » fig. 185.
› Release the door handle.
› Insert the vehicle key bit into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.
› Pull on the door handle and hold in place.
› Replace the cover.
The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside the vehicle.
› Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim» fig. 187 as far
as the latch.
› Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Emergency equipment, and self-help
167
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Fig. 189
Setting the service position for
the wiper arms
Fig. 188 Remove / release the selector lever
› Firmly apply the handbrake.
› Insert a flat-head screwdriver or similar tool into the gap in the arrow area
1
» fig. 188 and loosen the cover in the direct of arrow 2 .
› Press on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow 3 , simultaneously
press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in position N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
CAUTION
Make sure that when lifting the cover no parts are damaged by the screwdriver
in the selector lever environment.
Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons.

Read and observe
on page 168 first.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blades, close the bonnet and put the
windscreen wiper arms into the service position.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 190 Changing the front windscreen wiper blade
168
169
Setting the service position
› Switch the ignition on and off again.
› Push the lever in the direction of arrow» fig. 189within 10 seconds and hold
for approximately 2 seconds.
Removing the wiper blade
› Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of 1 » fig. 190.
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch A down in the direction of arrow
2.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
168 Do-it-yourself
3.

Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow 3 until it
locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
› Turn on the ignition and press the lever in the direction of the arrow
» fig. 189.
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses

Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position.
Introduction
Fig. 192
Blown fuse
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Fig. 191 Changing the rear window wiper blade

Read and observe
on page 168 first.
Removing the wiper blade
› Lift the wiper arm» page 169from the window in the direction of arrow 1
» fig. 191.
› Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
› Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch A down in the direction of arrow
2.
› Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 .
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
› Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow 3 until it
locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Fuses in the dashboard
Fuse arrangement in the dash panel
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fuse arrangement in the engine compartment
170
170
171
171
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisable from the melted-through metal strip » fig. 192.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 144.
CAUTION
Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
If a newly inserted fuse again blows after a short time, then seek assistance
from a specialist garage.
■ “Do not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger fuses There is a risk of fire and damage to another electrical system.
■
■
Notice
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses
may exist for a single power consuming device.
■
■
Fuses and light bulbs
169

Fuses in the dashboard
Fig. 193
Distribution board cover.
Read and observe
No.
1
2
3
4
5

Read and observe
and
on page 169 first.
The fuses are located on the left side of the dashboard behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
› Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
› Insert a screwdriver into the opening in the cover in the direction of the arrow » fig. 193.
› Remove the cover of the fuse box and remove.
› Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover in the dashboard.
› Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
› Re-insert the cover of the fuse box .
› Replace the bracket at the original position.
Fuse arrangement in the dash panel
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Fig. 194
Fuses
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
170 Do-it-yourself
and
on page 169 first.
Power consumer
Heating of the gearbox ventilation (diesel engine)
Automatic gearbox
Towing hitch - left lighting
Trailer device - electrical outlet
Instrument cluster, lever under the steering wheel, camera
Air blower for heating, radiator fan, air conditioning system, Climatronic
Rear window wiper
emergency call
Towing hitch - right lighting
Interior lighting, rear fog light
Rain sensor, light switch, diagnostic socket
Headlight – left side
Headlight - right side
Radio
Central control system, engine management system
Light switch
All-wheel drive
KESSY steering lock
Diagnostic connector, engine control system, brake sensor, allwheel drive, START-STOP button
ABS, ESC, switch for tyre air pressure display, Park Assist, switch for
OFF ROAD mode, START STOP button
Airbag
Variable Service Interval - WIV, reversing lamps, dimmable mirrors,
pressure sensor, telephone preparation, air mass meter, headlamp
levelling and swivelling headlights
Instrument cluster, electromechanical power steering, bus
Central locking, boot lid
Electric windows - Rear
Rear window heater, auxiliary heating and ventilation
Power socket in the luggage compartment

No.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Power consumer
Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof, electric operation of sun blinds
Fuel pump, injectors, AdBlue®Heating
Electric windows - front, outside mirror - Heating, fold-in function,
adjusting the mirror surface
12 volt power outlet - front and rear
Headlight cleaning system
Heated front seats
Heating, air conditioning, Climatronic, remote control for auxiliary
heating
Car alarm, reserve horn
Automatic gearbox
Towing hitch
Fuses in the engine compartment
Read and observe
and
Fuse arrangement in the engine compartment
Fig. 196
Fuses

Fig. 195
Distribution board cover.

CAUTION
The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be used
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a risk of
damage to the vehicle!
on page 169 first.
On some equipment, the battery cover must be unfolded before removing the
cover for the fuse box » page 150.
Replacing fuses
› Slide the safety clip A » fig. 195 in the direction of the arrow. The symbol is
displayed behind the catches. .
› Remove the cover.
› Replace the appropriate fuse.
› Replace the cover on the fuse box and the safety clip A move against the
arrow. The symbol is displayed in front of the catches. .
Read and observe
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
and
on page 169 first.
Power consumer
Not assigned
Automatic gearbox, AdBlue control system
Battery data module
ABS
Automatic gearbox
Not assigned
Power supply for terminal 15, starter
Radio, instrument cluster, phone
Not assigned
Engine control system
Auxiliary heating and ventilation
Bus
Engine control system
Ignition
Lambda probe, fuel pump, pre-heating device
Right headlight, right tail light
Horn
Fuses and light bulbs

171
No.
off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
▶ Faulty
18
19
Music amplifier
Windscreen wipers
20
21
22
Control valve for fuel pressure, high pressure pump
Lambda probe
Clutch pedal switch, brake pedal switch
Coolant pump, valve for charge pressure control, changeover valve
for radiator, fuel pump
Active charcoal filter, exhaust gas recirculation valve, radiator fan
ABS
Left front headlight, left tail light
Preheating device
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of
this terminal are automatically switched off.
Bulbs

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Bulb arrangement in the front headlights
Changing bulbs for low and main beam (Halogen headlights)
Remove protective guard for fog lights
Protective grille for removing fog lights - Park Assist sensor plug
Replacing light bulbs for fog lights
Changing the bulb for the licence plate light
Removing/installing tail light
Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp
In the case of failure of a Xenon gas discharge bulb or an LED diode, visit a
specialist garage.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 144.
■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users.
■ Bulbs H7 and H4 are pressurised and may burst when changed - there is a
risk of injury. We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
■ Do not carry out any work on the xenon gas discharge lamps- very dangerous!
■
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb. Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
Notice
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage.
■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehicle.
■
173
173
173
174
174
175
175
176
We recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other
expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
172
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb for the dipped beam, main beam or fog beam.
Windscreen heater
Power to the internal fuse carrier (fuses no. 24,27,31,32), electrically
adjustable seats
Terminal Xa)
29
a)
▶ Switch
Power consumer
Bulb arrangement in the front headlights
Fig. 197
Left headlight
› Remove the connector to the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 .
› Remove the connector.
› Insert the connector with the new bulb so that the fixing lug A
» fig. 198 fits
on the bulb into the recess on the reflector.
› Insert the respective protective cap » fig. 197 on page 173 and rotate it clockwise until it stops.
Notice
We recommend you have the bulb replacement performed by a specialist garage.

Remove protective guard for fog lights
Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
Arrangement for replacing bulbs » fig. 197
A Low beam with halogen bulb or Xenon gas discharge bulb
B Main beam
Changing bulbs for low and main beam (Halogen headlights)
Fig. 199 Guard: Version 1/version 2

Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
› Undo the protective grille in the direction of the arrow » fig. 199 using the
clamp for removing the wheel trims.
› Remove the protective grille.
Fig. 198 Replacing the bulb for low beam and main beam

Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
› Turn the respective protective cap » fig. 197 on page 173 counter-clockwise
and remove.
When removing the cap, make sure that this does not fall into the engine compartment.
› Disconnect the relevant connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 198.
Fuses and light bulbs
173
Protective grille for removing fog lights - Park Assist sensor plug
Fig. 200 Guard: Version 1/version 2
Replacing light bulbs for fog lights
Fig. 202 Remove the number plate light / replace the bulb

Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
First remove the grille for the fog lights » fig. 199 on page 173 and » fig. 200 on
page 174 before changing bulbs.
Removing the headlight
› Unscrew the screws A » fig. 202 with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
› Raise the headlight in the direction of the arrow 1 .
› Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 .
Fig. 201 Remove the plug

Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
› Remove the plastic cover for the guard in the direction of the arrow» fig. 200
using the bow to pull the full wheel covers.
› Remove the remaining part of the grille.
› Pull the latch out of the connector in the direction of the arrow 1
› Undo the latch on the connector in the direction of the arrow 2 .
› Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 3 .
Insertion of the ashtray takes place in reverse order.
Replacing the light bulb
› Pull the plug on the lamp base.
› Turn the socket with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow
3 » fig. 202.
› Insert the new socket with the bulb into the headlight and turn to the direction of arrow 3 as far as the stop.
› Attach the connector on the lamp base.
Refit the headlight and grille
» fig. 201.
› Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow
The protective grille must engage firmly.
1)
Applies to vehicles with parking assistance system.
174 Do-it-yourself
2
» fig. 202 and tighten.
› Attach the connector on guard carefully » fig. 201 on page 1741).
› Insert the protective grille and carefully press it in.
› Replace the plastic cover and press into the guard » fig. 200 on page 1741).

CAUTION
For vehicles with parking assistance, we recommend that after changing the
light bulb in the fog lights, the system is checked by a specialist.
Removing/installing tail light
Changing the bulb for the licence plate light
Fig. 204 Remove light / pull out connector

Fig. 203 Remove the number plate light / replace the bulb

Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
› Open the luggage compartment lid.
› Push in the light in the direction of arrow 1 » fig. 203until it is detached.
› Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it.
› Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 .
› Insert a new bulb into the holder.
› Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 .
› Push on the light until the spring clicks into place.
› Shut the boot lid.
Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
Removing
› Open the luggage compartment lid.
› Use the screwdriver from the tool kit to unscrew the lamp » fig. 204.
› Grasp the light and carefully remove with shaky movements in the direction
of arrow 1 » fig. 204.
› Disconnect the plug connection by pressing the catches in direction of the
arrow 2 and by pulling them in direction of the arrow 3 .
Installing
› Insert the connector into the lamp and lock it securely.
› Insert the light into the mounts in the body » fig. 204.
› Carefully press the light into the chassis so that the bolts 1 » fig. 205 on
page 176 or » fig. 206 on page 176 on the light engage into the mounts on
the chassis» .
› Screw the light with the screws » fig. 204 into place.
› Shut the boot lid.
CAUTION
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when removing and installing the tail lamp.
Fuses and light bulbs
175
Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp
Light with LED diodes
› Unlock the bulb holder using the marked area with arrows » fig. 206 and remove the bulb holder from the light.
› Turn the respective light bulb » fig. 206 until it stops counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
› Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
› Insert the lamp holder in the lamp until it is secure.
Fig. 205 Inner part of the light: Ground light
Fig. 206 Inner part of the light: Light with LED diodes

Read and observe
and
on page 172 first.
Ground light
› With the spanner from the vehicle tools unscrew the securing screw A
» fig. 205.
› Unlock the bulb holder using the marked area with arrows » fig. 205 and remove the bulb holder from the light.
› Turn the respective bulb B until it stops counter-clockwise and remove it
from the bulb holder.
› Insert a new bulb B into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
› Pull bulb C out of the socket and insert a new bulb.
› Insert the bulb holder into the light and screw in the safety screw
A » fig. 205 .
176 Do-it-yourself
Vehicle data
Technical data
Technical data
Basic vehicle data

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
Vehicle data
Operating weight
Payload
Measurement of fuel consumption and of CO2-emissions according to ECE
Regulations and EU Directives
Dimensions
Angle and gradeability
177
178
178
178
180
181
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The performance values listed were determined without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under
conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles.
The values listed are designed for the basic model without optional equipment.
Fig. 207 Vehicle data sticker/type plate
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker» fig. 207 - is located on the base of the luggage
compartment and is also stuck into the Owner's Manual.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data.
1 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 Vehicle type
3 Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine
code
4 Partial vehicle description
5 Approved tyre diameter in inches1)
The approved tyres and rim sizes for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle's
technical documentation (the so called COC document) and this also states the
declaration of conformity.
Type plate
The type plate » fig. 207 -  is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
The type plate lists the following data.
6 Vehicle manufacturers
7 Vehicle identification number (VIN)
8 Maximum permissible gross weight
9 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
1)

Only valid for some countries.
Technical data
177
10
11
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension leg turret. This number
is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen (together with a VIN bar code).
Engine number
The engine number (three-digit identifier and serial number) is stamped on the
engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents, field 17.
Maximum permissible combination weight
The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
1000 metres above sea level.
The engine output falls as the height increases, as does the ability to climb.
Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (or part), the maximum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of accident and damage!
Operating weight
This value is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible operating weight without further weight-reducing equipment (e.g. air conditioning,
spare wheel etc.). It also includes a weight allowance for the driver (75 kg), the
weight of the operating fluids, the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity.
178 Technical data
Operating weight
Engine
Gearbox
Operating weight (kg)
2.0 l/81 kW TDI CR
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR
MG
MG 4x4
1420
1535
Notice
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference
between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following components.
▶ The weight of the rider.
▶ The weight of all luggage and other loads.
▶ The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
▶ The weight of the equipment that are excluded from the operating weight.
▶ Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer (max. 80 kg or 85 kg for vehicles
4x4 with the 2.0 l / 103 kW TDI CR and 2.0 l / 110 kW TDI CR engine).
Measurement of fuel consumption and of CO2-emissions according
to ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions were not available at the
time of publication.
The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are provided on ŠKODA websites or the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.

Notice
The emission and fuel consumption figures given on the ŠKODA websites or
in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established
in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by statutory or
technical rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehicles.
■ Depending on the complexity of the equipment, the driving style, traffic conditions, weather influences and vehicle condition, using the vehicle can in
practice result in fuel economy figures being achieved that differ from the fuel
consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commercial and
technical vehicle documentation.
■
Technical data
179
Dimensions
Fig. 208 Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions operating weight without driver (in mm)
» fig. 208 Specification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Height
Track gauge front
Width
Track gauge rear
Width including exterior mirror
Clearance
Wheel base
Length
180 Technical data
Yeti
Yeti Outdoor
1691
1541
1793
1537
1956
180
2578
4222
Angle and gradeability
C
D
Overhang angle, rear
Slope angle / climbing ability
The overhang angle values indicate the maximum incline of a slope, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without the bumper or underbody making contact with the slope. The valueslisted represent the maximum front and
rear axle load.
The ramp angle indicates the value to which the vehicle can travel at a slow
speed on a ramp without the underbody making contact with the ramp edge.
TheIncline / gradeability indicates the value to which the vehicle can drive up
a slope on its own (Independent of the road surface and engine power). The
difference of altitude (upward slope) which is overcome on a stretch of road of
100 m, is indicated in percentage or degrees.
Fig. 209 Overhang angle and ramp angle / slope angle
Angle » fig. 209
A Overhang angle, front
B Ramp angle
Angle and climbing ability
Engine
2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR
2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR
Overhang angle front (°)
Overhang angle rear (°)
Ramp angle (°)
Slope angle (°)/climbing ability (%)
19
19
32
32
19.6
19.6
29/55
31/60
Technical data
181
Vehicle-specific details per engine type

Introduction
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR engine
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR engine
182
182
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW per rpm)
Max. torque (Nm at 1/min)
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Gearbox
Top speed (km/h)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
81/4200
250 / 1500-2500
4/1968
MG
177
11.6
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW per rpm)
Max. torque (Nm at 1/min)
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3)
Gearbox
Top speed (km/h)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s)
182 Technical data
103/4200
320 / 1750-2500
4/1968
MG 4x4
190
9.9
Index
A
ABS
Operation
Warning light
Accessories
Adaptive headlight
see xenon headlight
AdBlue
Check level
refill
warning light
Adjusting
Steering wheel
Adjusting seats manually
Adjusting the seats
Adjustment
Mirrors
Advice on tyre/wheel usage
AFS
Display messages
Warning light
AHL
see xenon headlight
air bag
Airbag
Adjustments and impairments to the airbag
system
Deployment
Warning light
Airbag system
Air conditioning
Air discharge nozzles
Manual air conditioning
Recirculation mode
Air conditioning system
Climatronic
Air discharge nozzles
113
36
133
62
143
143
144
32
12
71
11
69
152
36
36
62
17
134
18
38
17
96
99
97
99
97
99
Alarm
Trailer
All-year tyres
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Anti-theft alarm system
Trailer
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Armrest
Front
Ashtray
Assistance systems
Auto Check Control
Automatic drive
Selector lever
Automatic driving light control
Automatic gearbox
Kickdown
Release selector lever
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
Selector lever lock
Starting-off and driving
Tiptronic
Automatic shutdown of consumers
Automatic transmission
AUX
Aux. heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
B
Battery
Changing batteries for the removable light
Changing in key
Replace the battery in the remote control in
the auxiliary heating
Belts
Belt tensioners
Bluetooth
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
54
132
154
113
54
132
159
Bonnet
Closing
Opening
Boot lid
Automatic locking
Open/close
See boot lid
Warning light
73 Brake Assist (HBA)
81 Brake booster
113 Brake fluid
Check
32
specification
Brake pads
109
New
62
Brake pedal (automatic transmission)
Warning light
111
Brakes
110
Brake booster
168
Brake fluid
110
Braking and stabilisation systems
111
Handbrake
110
Information for the brakes
149
Warning light
109
Brake system
79
Breakdown kit
100
Breakdown service
112
see Emergency assistance
Bulbs
Replacing
Button in driver's door
166
electric windows
166
166
14
16
7
145
145
56
55
55
34
114
106
149
149
149
106
39
106
149
113
107
106
34
113
161
9
172
57
C
Camera
See reversing camera
Car battery
Check condition
Cover
Disconnecting and reconnecting
119
150
150
151
Index
183
Replacing
Winter operation
Car care
Exterior
Interior
Car computer
see multifunction display
Care and Maintenance
Carrier
Car washing
Interior
washing
Central locking
Problems
Central locking button
Changing
Batteries for the removable light
Battery
Wheels
Windscreen wiper blades
Changing a wheel
Changing
Changing gear
Selector lever
Charging a vehicle battery
Check
Brake fluid
Engine oil
Fasten ball rod
Oil level
Checking
Battery status
Coolant
Children and safety
Child safety lock
Child seat
Classification
Installation location
in the passenger seat
ISOFIX
184 Index
151
150
138
140
43
133
95
137
140
137
50
54
52
166
166
157
169
157
157
109
151
149
147
129
147
150
148
22
53
22
24
24, 25
24
25
on the front passenger seat
on the passenger seat
TOP TETHER
Cigarette lighter
Climatronic
Automatic operation
Controls
Recirculation mode
Clothes hook
cockpit
Cockpit
Lighting
Comfort control
window
Comfort signalling
COMING HOME
Compartments
Component protection
Computer
see multifunction display
Convenience operation
sliding / tilting roof (Octavia)
Coolant
Checking
Refilling
Temperature display
Warning light
CORNER
See Fog lights with the CORNER function
Cornering lights
Display messages
Correct routing of seat belt
Correct seated position
Correct seating position
Cruise control system
Warning light
Cup holders
23
23
26
80
98
97
99
85
29
64
58
62
63
77
134
43
59
147
148
148
31
34
63
36
15
11
13
39
80
D
DAY LIGHT
see Daylight driving lights
Daylight driving lights
Deactivating
airbags
Delayed locking of the boot lid
See boot lid
Departure angle
Diesel
Diesel fuel
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Digital Service Plan
Dipped beam
Dipstick
display
cardinal points
Display
Coolant temperature
Fuel level
Gear changes
In the instrument cluster
Service intervals
DisplayMAXI DOT
Display of the second speed
Display of the second speedometer
Disposal
The return and recycling of used vehicles
Door
Child safety lock
Emergency locking
Emergency locking of the driver's door
Opening/Closing
Warning light for an open door
door alarm
Drive
Driving through water
Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR)
61
61
20
56
181
142
142
37
137
61
147
40
31
31
41
40
46
44
41
41
135
53
167
167
53
34
40
112
114
Driving
Emissions
Fuel consumption
Maximum speed
through water
DSR
178
178
182
112
114
E
Economical driving
111
EDL
114
Electrical power windows
58
Button in the rear doors
57
Electric windows
56
58
Operational faults
Electric Windows
Button in driver’s door’
57
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
114
Electronic immobiliser
103
Emergency
Hazard warning light system
64
Jump-starting
163
Selector lever-unlocking
168
Starting / stopping the engine with the push of
a button
104
Starting the engine / stopping with the push of
a button
105
Towing the vehicle
164
Towing the vehicle using the trailer device
165
Tyre repair
161
Unlocking/locking the door
167
Unlocking / locking the door
167
Emergency assistance
9
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher
156
First aid kit
156
Jack
157
Reflective vest
156
Vehicle tool kit
157
Warning triangle
156
Emission control system
37
Emissions
End of Life Vehicles
Return and recycling
Engine
Running in
Engine compartment
Brake fluid
Coolant
Engine oil
Overview
Vehicle battery
Windscreen washer fluid
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Engine number
Engine oil
Check
Oil changing
Refilling
Specification
Warning light
EPC
ESC
Functionality
Warning light
178
135
111
144
149
147
146
146
149
146
113
177
146
147
146
147
147
35
37
113
36
F
Fastening bar with sliding hook
Fastening elements
Fatigue detection
Films
Fire extinguisher
First aid kit
Flashing
Flexible storage compartment
Floor covering in the luggage compartment
Fog lights
Warning light
Fog lights/rear fog light
Fog lights with the CORNER function
folding table
on the rear middle seat backrest
Folding table
on the front seat backrest
Footmats
see footmats
Force limiter
Window
Front seats
Fuel
Diesel
Fuel gauge
refer to Fuel
Refuelling
Unleaded petrol
Warning light
Fuel consumption
Fuel filter
information messages
Fuel reserve
Fuses
in the dashboard
in the dash panel
in the engine compartment
86
86
109
109
57
71
141
142
31
141
141
142
38
178
32
38
169
170
170
171
G
90
89
125
138
156
156
62
91
91
39
63
63
Gear changing
Gear stick
Gear shift
Gear recommendation
Information on the selected gear
Generator
warning light
Glasses storage box
GPS
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
gradeability
108
41
41
34
84
7
181
Index
185
H
Handbrake
Warning light
Hazard warning light system
HBA
Headlamp failure
Warning light
Headlamps
Warning light
Headrests
Heating
Controls
Mirrors
Recirculation mode
Seats
Windscreen and rear window
HHC
Hill Start Assist (HHC)
hitch
horn
107
34
64
114
36
36
76
96
97
69
99
76
66
114
114
131
29
I
I-PAD holder
I Automatic belt retractors
Ignition lock
Images
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
Immobiliser
In an emergency
Changing a wheel
incline
Individually controlled air conditioning
Recirculation mode
Information about the towing process
information system
door alarm
multifunction display
186 Index
87
16
104
7
103
157
181
99
164
40
40
43
Information system
Gear recommendation
MAXI DOT display
Service interval display
Infotainment
Instrument cluster
Auto Check Control
Display of the second speedometer
see Instrument cluster
Warning lights
instrument lighting
Interior lighting
interior lights
Interior monitor
ISOFIX
41
44
46
7
30
32
41
30
33
31
65
65
55
25
J
Jack
Jacking points
Raise vehicle
Jump-starting
157
160
163
K
KESSY
Unlocking/locking
key
Starting / stopping the engine
Switch on/off ignition
Key
Changing battery
Locking
Unlocking
51
104
104
166
50
50
L
LEAVING HOME
lever
Turn signal/main beam
63
62
Lever
Cruise control
Operation of the information system
Windscreen wipers
light
Flasher
Fog lights/rear fog light
instruments
Light
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
Headlight cleaning system
Replacing bulbs
Turn signal/main beam
Xenon headlight
lighting
Luggage Storage
Lighting
Interior lighting
Lights
Abroad
Automatic driving light control
Cockpit
Dayt. r. light
Dipped beam
Fog lights with the CORNER function
Hazard warning light system
Headlight range control
Parking lights
Switching on and off
Warning lights
Load
Lock
Individual settings
Locking
Central locking button
in case of emergency
KESSY
Key
Remote control
Lock steering lock
125
42
67, 68
62
63
31
63
68
172
62
62
93
64
60
64
62
64
61
61
63
64
61
61, 64
61
33
178
52
52
167
51
50
51
103
Luggage compartment
Class N1 vehicles
Cover
Fastening bar with sliding hook
Fastening elements
Flexible storage compartment
Floor covering on both sides
Net partition
Securing nets
Side compartments
unlock manually
Unlock the luggage compartment lid
Variable loading floor
Luggage compartment cover
Luggage compartment lid
Luggage Storage
lighting
removable light
89
94
91
90
89
91
91
92
90
93
167
167
94
91
55
93
93
M
Main beam
Warning light
Manual air conditioning
Controls
Manual gear changing
see gear changing
Materials defect liability
MAXI DOT
See MAXI DOT display
MAXI DOT display
Main menu
Menu item assistant system
Menu item Audio
Menu item navigation
Menu item Phone
Operation
Settings
Maximum speed
Mechanical window lifters
open/close
62
39
97
108
4
44
44
45
45
44
45
42
45
182
56
Media
AUX
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
USB
Memory
Memory Function of seats
MFD
see multifunction display
Mirror
Vanity
Modes of the automatic transmission
Modifications and technical alterations
MSR
Multifunction display
Data
Functions
Memory
Multifunction pocket
Multifunction steering wheel
Multimedia holder
79
7
79
44
72
43
68
66
109
133
113
43
43
44
90
42
83
N
N1
Nameplate
Navigation
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
Net partition
Nets
94
177
7
92
90
O
OFF ROAD
ABS
ASR
EDS
Hill Descent Assistant
mode
Start-Off assist
OFF ROAD mode
Warning light
115
116
116
116
116
115
117
115
39
oil
see Engine oil
Oil
warning notifications
Oil changing
Engine oil
Oil pressure
warning notifications
On-board computer
see multifunction display
Open door
warning light
Operating weight
Original Accessories
Original parts
Outside temperature
overview
cockpit
Overview
Engine compartment
Fuses
Warning lights
147
35
146
35
43
34
178
134
134
43
29
146
169
33
P
Park assist
Parking
Park Assist
Automatic brake assist
from a parking space parallel to the road
Malfunctions
Operation
Parking space search
Parking
Park Assist
Parking assistance
Reversing camera
Parking aid
Functionality
Index
123
121
124
123
124
121
122
108
121
117
119
117
187
Parking assistance
Activation / deactivation
Display in the Infotainment display
Parking lights
Parking the vehicle
see Parking
ParkPilot
Parts replacement
Passive safety
Before setting off
Driving safety
Passive Safety
Pedals
Footmats
Petrol
Pockets
Pockets in the luggage compartment
Power limit
sliding/tilting roof
Tilt / slide sunroof
Power Steering
Power windows
Button in the front passenger door
Practical features
glasses storage box
Multimedia holder
Pockets
removable through-loading bag
Storage compartment for umbrella
Storage net in the front centre console
Waste container
Preheating unit
117
119
118
61
108
117
133
11
11
11
109
109
142
85
90
59
59
35
57
84
83
85
87
85
84
82
37
R
Radio
See Owner's Manual Infotainment/Radio
Raise vehicle
Rear fog light
Warning light
188 Index
7
160
63
36
Rear seats
73
Rear View Camera
120
Function keys
Operation
120
Orientation Lines
120
Rear view mirror
68
Rear window - heating
66
Recirculation mode
99
refilling
AdBlue
144
Refilling
Coolant
148
Engine oil
147
146
Windscreen washer fluid
Reflective vest
156
Refuelling
141
Fuel
141
Regulation
Headlight beam
61
remote
Synchronization process
54
Remote control
Aux. heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 102
Changing battery
166
Unlocking/locking the vehicle
51
Removable light
93
Changing batteries
166
87
Removable through-loading bag
Repairs and technical alterations
133
Replace
Battery
166
Replacing
Bulbs
172
Fuses
169
Windscreen wiper blades
168
Retract
Brake pads
106
Reversing camera
119
Rims
152
Roof
Load
Roof rack
Running in
Tyres
Running in the
Engine
95
95
152
111
S
SafeLock
safety
airbag
Safety
Child safety
Child safety seats
Correct seated position
Headrests
ISOFIX
TOP TETHER
SAFE, SAFELOCK
See SafeLock
Saving electrical energy
Saving fuel
SD-Karte
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
Seat belt
height adjustment
rear middle seat
Seat belts
Seatbelts
Automatic belt retractors Inertia reels
Seat belts
Belt tensioners
fastening and unfastening
Warning light
Seat electrical adjustment
Seats
Electrical adjustment
Folding front passenger seat
52
17
11
22
22
11
76
25
26
52
111
111
7
15
16
14
16
16
15
34
71
71
73
front
71
Front armrest
73
76
Headrests
Heating
76
Manually adjusting
71
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable
seat
72
Rear
73
Setting
71
store
72
Storing in memory of remote control key
72
Seats and head restraints
71
Selector lever
109
Selector lever control
109
Selector lever lock
39
Warning light
service
133
Service
Service interval display
46
Service intervals
135, 136
Service Plan
137
Setting
Aux. heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 101
Headrests
76
Mirrors
69
Seat belt height
15
Seats
71
41
Setting the Digital Clock
Setting the time
41
Shifting
Tiptronic
110
Sliding/tilting roof
Activating operation of the sunshade
60
Sunshade
60
SmartGate
connection using Wi-Fi direct
48
Connection via Wi-Fi
48
introductory information
47
Password/PIN code change
49
Setting
49
SmartLink
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
7
SMS
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
7
Snow chains
155
sockets
12-volt power socket in the luggage compartment
82
12-volt socket in the interior
82
Sound
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
7
Spare wheel
154
Removing / stowing
158
124
Speed control system
Speed symbol
154
Speed warning when exceeding the speed limit 43
Spoiler
134
Stabilisation system
113
Stability Control (ESC)
113
START-STOP
105
Jump-starting
163
operation
105
System deactivation/activation manually
106
START-STOP system
105
Start engine
Immobiliser
103
Starter button
103
Lock / unlock the steering lock
Problems with the engine start
105
Starting / stopping the engine
104
Switch on/off ignition
104
Starting engine
Jump-starting
163
Starting the engine
Jump-starting
163
Key
104
Starter button
104
Steering lock ( KESSY system)
Warning light
35
Steering wheel
adjusting
Buttons
Correct posture
Stopping
see Parking
Stopping the engine
Key
Starter button
Storage
Storage box
Storage compartment
below the front armrest
Glasses storage box
in the doors
in the front middle console
in the rear centre console
on the dash panel
on the passenger side
Storage compartments
Storage net in the front centre console
Sunshade of the sliding/tilting roof
Sun visors
Switch
Car battery
Switching the lights on and off
Switch off
Alarm
Switch off ignition
Key
Switch on ignition
Key
12
42
12
108
104
104
77
93
83
84
79
79
86
78
84
77
84
60
66
151
61
54
104
104
104
104
T
table
on the rear middle seat backrest
Table
on the front seat backrest
Tablet holder
86
86
87
Index
189
Tachometer
TCS
deactivate/activate
Operation
Warning light
Technical data
Telephone
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
Tests
Tests required by law
The return and recycling of used vehicles
Through-loading bag
Ticket holder
Tilt / slide sunroof
Activate operation
Operation
Tiptronic
Tools
TOP TETHER
Towing
Towing a trailer
Towing device
Accessories
Description
Vertical load
Towing eye
Towing protection
Towing the vehicle
Traction control (TCS)
Trailer
Connect and disconnect
Load
loading
Towing a trailer
Trailer stabilization system (TSA)
Trailer towing
Transmission
Warning messages
190 Index
30
114
114
36
177
7
133
135
87
78
59
59
110
157
26
164, 165
132
127
130
127
127
165
55
164
36, 114
131
132
131
132
115
127
32
transport
Luggage compartment
Transport
Roof rack
Towing device and trailer
Transporting children
Triangle
TSA
Turn off TCS
Warning light
Turn signal
Turn signal system
Warning light
Tyre load capacity
Tyre pressure
Warning light
Tyre pressure monitor
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring
Tyre pressure monitoring
Warning light
Tyre repair
Tyres
damage
Explanation of the label
new
Tyre pressure
Wear indicator
Tyre size
89
95
127
22
156
115
36
62
39
154
153
38
126
126
38
161
152
152
154
152
153
153
154
U
Umbrella
Tray
Unlock
Individual settings
Unlocking
Central locking button
In case of emergency
KESSY
85
52
52
167
51
Key
50
Remote control
51
50
Unlocking and locking
Unlock steering lock
103
USB
79
Useful equipment
Clothes hook
85
Cup holders
80
Useful features
Storage compartment
77
Useful Features
12-volt power socket in the luggage compartment
82
82
12-volt socket in the interior
Ashtray
81
Cigarette lighter
80
Reflective vest
156
Ticket holder
78
Using the variable loading floor with a spare
wheel
using
95
V
Variable loading floor
Variable loading floor with spare wheel
Removable storage box
Vehicle battery
Automatic shutdown of consumers
charging
Safety instructions
Vehicle care
Vehicle cleaning
Vehicle condition
See Auto-Check Control
Vehicle data sticker
Vehicle data sticker and nameplate
Vehicle data sticker and nameplate
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle height
94
93
149
151
149
137
137
32
177
177
180
180
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle length
Vehicle tool kit
Vehicle washing
Exterior
Vehicle width
Vest
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
Visibility
Visors
Voice control
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
177
180
157
138
180
156
177
65
66
7
W
Warning lights
MAXI DOT display
Warning of a low temperature
Warning symbols
MAXI DOT display
see Warning lights
Warning triangle
Warranty
Waste container
Water in the fuel filter
Weather conditions
Weights
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Caps
Loosening and tightening
Wheels
Full trim
Load Index
Low-profile tyres
Snow chains
Speed symbol
Tyre age
Tyre damage
33
32
39
32
33
156
4
82
32
133
177, 178
159
159
160
152
158
154
152
155
154
152
152
Tyre pressure
153 Xenon headlights
Tyre storage
152
Warning light
154
Winter tyres
Wi-Fi
48
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
7
Wi-Fi direct
48
Window
operation
56
Window operation
56
Windscreen - heating
66
Windscreen and rear window heating
66
Windscreen washer fluid
Refilling
146
39
Warning light
Windscreen washer system
67
Windscreen wipers and washers
67
Activation
67
Add fluid
146
Automatic rear window wiper
68
Operation
68
Replacing the windscreen wiper blade
169
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
168
Service position of the windscreen wiper arms 168
winter operation
154
Winter operation
All-year tyres
154
Car battery
150
142
Diesel fuel
Snow chains
155
Winter tyres
154
Winter tyres
154
Wipers and washer
Warning light for windscreen washer fluid level 39
Wiping interval
67
WLAN
See Owner's Manual Infotainment
7
36
X
Xenon headlight
62
Index
191
192 Index
Index
193
194 Index
Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s..
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2016
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Yeti anglicky – Indie/Nepál 11.2016
S90.5610.30.91
5L0012791AM

5L0012791AM